C141-E280-01EN
MHZ2320BJ, MHZ2250BJ, MHZ2200BJ,
MHZ2160BJ, MHZ2120BJ, MHZ2080BJ
DISK DRIVES
PRODUCT/MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Revision History
(1/1)
Revised section (*1)
(Added/Deleted/Altered)
Edition
01
Date
Details
2008-03-31
*1 Section(s) with asterisk (*) refer to the previous edition when those were deleted.
C141-E280
This page is intentionally left blank.
Preface
This manual describes MHZ2320BJ, MHZ2250BJ, MHZ2200BJ, MHZ2160BJ,
MHZ2120BJ, MHZ2080BJ model of the MHZ Series, 2.5-inch hard disk drives.
These drives have a built-in controller that is compatible with the Serial-ATA
interface.
This manual describes the specifications and functions of the drives and explains
in detail how to incorporate the drives into user systems. This manual assumes
that the reader has a basic knowledge of hard disk drives and their
implementations in computer systems.
This manual consists of seven chapters and sections explaining the special
terminology and abbreviations used in this manual:
Overview of Manual
CHAPTER 1
This chapter gives an overview of the disk drive and describes their features.
CHAPTER 2 Device Configuration
Device Overview
This chapter describes the internal configurations of the disk drive and the
configuration of the systems in which they operate.
CHAPTER 3
Installation Conditions
This chapter describes the external dimensions, installation conditions, and switch
settings of the disk drive.
CHAPTER 4
This chapter describes the operation theory of the disk drive.
CHAPTER 5 Interface
This chapter describes the interface specifications of the disk drive.
CHAPTER 6 Operations
This chapter describes the operations of the disk drive.
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance and Diagnosis
Theory of Device Operation
This chapter explains the maintenance requirements, operation verification,
troubleshooting, and removal/replacement of the disk drives.
Glossary
The glossary describes the technical terms that need to be understood to read this
manual.
C141-E280
i
Preface
Acronyms and Abbreviations
This section gives the meanings of the definitions used in this manual.
Conventions for Alert Messages
This manual uses the following conventions to show the alert messages. An alert
message consists of an alert signal and alert statements. The alert signal consists
of an alert symbol and a signal word or just a signal word.
The following are the alert signals and their meanings:
This indicates a hazardous situation could result in
minor or moderate personal injury if the user does
not perform the procedure correctly. This alert signal
also indicates that damages to the product or other
property may occur if the user does not perform the
procedure correctly.
This indicates information that could help the user
use the product more efficiently.
In the text, the alert signal is centered, followed below by the indented message.
A wider line space precedes and follows the alert message to show where the alert
message begins and ends. The following is an example:
(Example)
Data corruption: Avoid mounting the disk drive near strong
magnetic sources such as loud speakers. Ensure that the disk drive
is not affected by external magnetic fields.
The main alert messages in the text are also listed in the "Important Alert Items."
Operating Environment
This product is designed for mobile system as notebook PCs, and to be used
within environmental specification. (please refer to the Chapter 1 in this manual.)
ii
C141-E280
Preface
Conventions
An MHZ series device is sometimes simply referred to as a "hard disk drive,"
"HDD," "drive," or "device" in this document.
Decimal numbers are represented normally.
Hexadecimal numbers are represented as shown in the following examples:
X'17B9', 17B9h, 17B9H, or 17B9H.
Binary numbers are represented as shown in the following examples: 010 or 010b.
Serial-ATA may be referred to as "SATA".
Representation of the data storage capacity
One gigabyte (GB) = one billion bytes; accessible capacity will be
less and actual capacity depends on the operating environment and
formatting.
Attention
Please forward any comments you may have regarding this manual.
To make this manual easier for users to understand, opinions from readers are
needed. Please write your opinions or requests on the Comment at the back of this
manual and forward it to the address described in the sheet.
Liability Exception
"Disk drive defects" refers to defects that involve adjustment, repair, or
replacement.
Fujitsu is not liable for any other disk drive defects, such as those caused by user
misoperation or mishandling, inappropriate operating environments, defects in the
power supply or cable, problems of the host system, or other causes outside the
disk drive.
C141-E280
iii
Preface
Hot Plug
These drives support Hot Plug which is based on Serial ATA Revision 2.6
Specification.
However, the disk drive installation and removal notes on safety precautions with
regard to hot-plugging vary depending on the specific requirements and
environment-related conditions of the system to which the drive is connected by
hot-plugging.
When using the drive under general conditions of use (i.e., without hot-plugging),
observe the important alert messages and notes on safety precautions given in this
manual.
For the electrical recommendation to the host system which supports hot-plugging
with this drives, refer to Section 5.1.6.
Compliance with Administration on the Control of Pollution Caused by Electronic
Information Products of the People's Republic of China
This product is shipped as a component to manufacture the final products. Therefore, the packaging material
code provided in GB18455-2001 is not marked on any packaging part of this product.
iv
C141-E280
Important Alert Items
Important Alert Messages
The important alert messages in this manual are as follows:
A hazardous situation could result in minor or moderate personal
injury if the user does not perform the procedure correctly. Also,
damage to the product or other property, may occur if the user does not
perform the procedure correctly.
Task
Alert message
Page
3-7
Normal Operation
Data corruption: Avoid mounting the disk near strong
magnetic sources such as loud speakers. Ensure that the disk
drive is not affected by external magnetic fields.
Damage: Do not press the cover of the disk drive. Pressing
it too hard, the cover and the spindle motor contact, which
may cause damage to the disk drive.
Static: When handling the device, disconnect the body
ground (500 kΩ or greater). Do not touch the printed circuit
board, but hold it by the edges.
Maintenance
Static, Damage
7-2
1. Don’t install or remove a PCA or connect or disconnect
a cable or connector plug when the drive is powered.
This may give you an electric shock.
2. Avoid dangerous detergent when the disk drive is
cleaned.
C141-E280
v
Important Alert Items
Task
Alert message
Page
7-2
Maintenance
Device damage
1. Before touching a PCA or the drive, wear a wrist strap
and perform the human body grounding to discharge
static electricity from your body. This will prevent
irreparable damage to the PCA and the head of the drive.
2. Don’t install or remove a PCA or connect or disconnect
a cable or connector plug when the drive is powered.
This will prevent electrical damage to the disk drive.
3. Operating the disk drive with one or more PCA missing
will be unpredictable. Only power the drive with all
boards installed.
4. Avoid any detergent when cleaning the disk drive.
5. Keep all vents open opened and unblocked.
6. Do not apply excessive force to the cover under any
circumstances. Doing so may cause irreparable damage
to the cover.
Device damage
7-3
7-4
The DE is completely sealed. Do not open the DE in the
field.
Data corruption
When asking for repair, save all data stored in the disk drive
beforehand. Fujitsu Limited is not responsible for any loss of
data during service and repair.
Device damage
7-14
7-15
The disk enclosure (DE) must never to be opened in the field.
Opening the disk enclosure may cause irreparable damage.
Damage or Device damage
1. Perform any removal after the system power is
completely disconnected. The cable must not be
disconnected and the screws that attach the drive must
not be removed with the power ON.
2. Do not move the drive and attach or detach the connector
until it comes to a complete stop (about 30 s after the
power is turned OFF).
3. Perform the human body grounding to discharge any
static electricity from your body. (Be sure to wear a
wrist strap)
vi
C141-E280
Manual Organization
MHZ2320BJ, MHZ2250BJ,
MHZ2200BJ, MHZ2160BJ,
MHZ2120BJ, MHZ2080BJ
• Device Overview
• Device Configuration
• Installation Conditions
• Theory of Device Operation
• Interface
DISK DRIVES
PRODUCT/MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
• Operations
• Maintenance and Diagnosis
(C141-E280)
<This manual>
C141-E280
vii
This page is intentionally left blank.
Contents
CHAPTER 1 Device Overview ....................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Features............................................................................................................ 1-2
1.1.1 Functions and performance.................................................................. 1-2
1.1.2 Adaptability ......................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.3 Interface............................................................................................... 1-3
1.2 Device Specifications....................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.1 Specifications summary....................................................................... 1-5
1.2.2 Model and product number.................................................................. 1-7
1.3 Power Requirements ........................................................................................ 1-8
1.4 Environmental Specifications ........................................................................ 1-11
1.5 Acoustic Noise............................................................................................... 1-12
1.6 Shock and Vibration....................................................................................... 1-12
1.7 Reliability....................................................................................................... 1-13
1.8 Error Rate....................................................................................................... 1-14
1.9 Media Defects ................................................................................................ 1-14
1.10 Load/Unload Function ................................................................................... 1-14
1.10.1 Recommended power-off sequence................................................... 1-15
1.11 Advanced Power Management (APM) .......................................................... 1-15
1.12 Interface Power Management (IPM).............................................................. 1-17
1.12.1 Host-initiated interface power management (HIPM) ........................ 1-17
1.12.2 Device-initiated interface power management (DIPM)..................... 1-17
CHAPTER 2 Device Configuration................................................................ 2-1
2.1 Device Configuration....................................................................................... 2-2
C141-E280
ix
Contents
2.2 System Configuration.......................................................................................2-3
2.2.1 SATA interface ....................................................................................2-3
2.2.2 Drive connection..................................................................................2-3
CHAPTER 3 Installation Conditions..............................................................3-1
3.1 Dimensions.......................................................................................................3-2
3.2 Mounting..........................................................................................................3-3
3.3 Connections with Host System.........................................................................3-9
3.3.1 Device connector .................................................................................3-9
3.3.2 Signal segment and power supply segment .......................................3-10
3.3.3 Connector specifications for host system...........................................3-10
3.3.4 SATA interface cable connection ......................................................3-11
3.3.5 Note about SATA interface cable connection....................................3-11
CHAPTER 4 Theory of Device Operation......................................................4-1
4.1 Outline..............................................................................................................4-2
4.2 Subassemblies ..................................................................................................4-2
4.2.1 Disk......................................................................................................4-2
4.2.2 Spindle .................................................................................................4-2
4.2.3 Actuator................................................................................................4-2
4.2.4 Air filter ...............................................................................................4-3
4.3 Circuit Configuration .......................................................................................4-3
4.4 Power-on Sequence..........................................................................................4-6
4.5 Self-calibration.................................................................................................4-8
4.5.1 Self-calibration contents ......................................................................4-8
4.5.2 Execution timing of self-calibration ....................................................4-9
4.5.3 Command processing during self-calibration ......................................4-9
4.6 Read/write Circuit ..........................................................................................4-10
4.6.1 Read/write preamplifier (PreAMP)....................................................4-10
4.6.2 Write circuit .......................................................................................4-10
x
C141-E280
Contents
4.6.3 Read circuit........................................................................................ 4-11
4.6.4 Digital PLL circuit............................................................................. 4-11
4.7 Servo Control................................................................................................. 4-12
4.7.1 Servo control circuit .......................................................................... 4-12
4.7.2 Data-surface servo format.................................................................. 4-14
4.7.3 Servo frame format............................................................................ 4-16
4.7.4 Actuator motor control ...................................................................... 4-17
4.7.5 Spindle motor control ........................................................................ 4-18
CHAPTER 5 Interface..................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Physical Interface............................................................................................. 5-2
5.1.1 Interface signals................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.2 Signal interface regulation................................................................... 5-4
5.1.3 Electrical specifications....................................................................... 5-6
5.1.4 Connector pinouts................................................................................ 5-7
5.1.5 P11 function......................................................................................... 5-8
5.1.6 Hot Plug............................................................................................. 5-10
5.2 Logical Interface ............................................................................................ 5-11
5.2.1 Communication layers....................................................................... 5-12
5.2.2 Outline of the Shadow Block Register .............................................. 5-13
5.2.3 Outline of the frame information structure (FIS)............................... 5-14
5.2.4 Shadow block registers...................................................................... 5-22
5.3 Host Commands............................................................................................. 5-27
5.3.1 Command code and parameters......................................................... 5-27
5.3.2 Command descriptions ...................................................................... 5-30
(1) RECALIBRATE (X '10' to X '1F')............................................ 5-31
(2) READ SECTOR(S) (X '20' or X '21')........................................ 5-32
(3) WRITE SECTOR(S) (X '30' or X '31')...................................... 5-34
(4) WRITE VERIFY (X '3C').......................................................... 5-36
(5) READ VERIFY SECTOR(S) (X '40' or X '41') ........................ 5-38
(6) SEEK (X '70' to X '7F').............................................................. 5-40
(7) EXECUTE DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC (X '90') ........................... 5-41
(8) INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS (X '91') ...................... 5-42
C141-E280
xi
Contents
(9) DOWNLOAD MICROCODE (X '92')...................................... 5-43
(10) STANDBY IMMEDIATE (X '94' or X 'E0')............................. 5-46
(11) IDLE IMMEDIATE (X '95' or X 'E1')/UNLOAD
IMMEDIATE (X '95' or X 'E1')................................................. 5-47
(12) STANDBY (X '96' or X 'E2')..................................................... 5-49
(13) IDLE (X '97' or X 'E3') .............................................................. 5-50
(14) CHECK POWER MODE (X '98' or X 'E5') .............................. 5-52
(15) SLEEP (X '99' or X 'E6')........................................................... 5-53
(16) SMART (X 'B0')........................................................................ 5-54
(17) DEVICE CONFIGURATION (X 'B1') ..................................... 5-84
(18) READ MULTIPLE (X 'C4') ...................................................... 5-89
(19) WRITE MULTIPLE (X 'C5') .................................................... 5-92
(20) SET MULTIPLE MODE (X 'C6') ............................................. 5-94
(21) READ DMA (X 'C8' or X 'C9') ................................................. 5-96
(22) WRITE DMA (X 'CA' or X 'CB').............................................. 5-98
(23) READ BUFFER (X 'E4')......................................................... 5-100
(24) FLUSH CACHE (X 'E7')......................................................... 5-101
(25) WRITE BUFFER (X 'E8') ....................................................... 5-102
(26) IDENTIFY DEVICE (X 'EC') ................................................. 5-103
(27) IDENTIFY DEVICE DMA (X 'EE') ....................................... 5-104
(28) SET FEATURES (X 'EF')........................................................ 5-119
(29) SECURITY SET PASSWORD (X 'F1').................................. 5-126
(30) SECURITY UNLOCK (X 'F2') ............................................... 5-128
(31) SECURITY ERASE PREPARE (X 'F3')................................. 5-130
(32) SECURITY ERASE UNIT (X 'F4')......................................... 5-131
(33) SECURITY FREEZE LOCK (X 'F5') ..................................... 5-133
(34) SECURITY DISABLE PASSWORD (X 'F6') ........................ 5-135
(35) READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS (X 'F8') ............................ 5-137
(36) SET MAX (X 'F9')................................................................... 5-138
(37) READ SECTOR(S) EXT (X '24')............................................ 5-144
(38) READ DMA EXT (X '25')....................................................... 5-145
(39) READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS EXT (X '27').................... 5-146
(40) READ MULTIPLE EXT (X '29') ............................................ 5-147
(41) READ LOG EXT (X '2F') ....................................................... 5-148
(42) WRITE SECTOR(S) EXT (X '34').......................................... 5-154
(43) WRITE DMA EXT (X '35')..................................................... 5-155
xii
C141-E280
Contents
(44) SET MAX ADDRESS EXT (X '37')....................................... 5-156
(45) WRITE MULTIPLE EXT (X '39').......................................... 5-158
(46) WRITE DMA FUA EXT (X '3D')........................................... 5-159
(47) WRITE LOG EXT (X '3F') ..................................................... 5-160
(48) READ VERIFY SECTOR(S) EXT (X '42')............................ 5-164
(49) WRITE UNCORRECTABLE EXT (X '45') ........................... 5-165
(50) READ LOG DMA EXT (X '47') ............................................. 5-167
(51) WRITE LOG DMA EXT (X '57') ........................................... 5-168
(52) READ FP DMA QUEUED (X '60') ........................................ 5-169
(53) WRITE FP DMA QUEUED (X '61') ...................................... 5-170
(54) WRITE MULTIPLE FUA EXT (X 'CE')................................ 5-171
(55) FLUSH CACHE EXT (X 'EA')............................................... 5-172
5.3.3 Error posting.................................................................................... 5-173
5.4 Command Protocol ...................................................................................... 5-175
5.4.1 Non-data command protocol ........................................................... 5-176
5.4.2 PIO data-in command protocol........................................................ 5-178
5.4.3 PIO data-out command protocol...................................................... 5-180
5.4.4 DMA data-in command protocol..................................................... 5-182
5.4.5 DMA data-out command protocol................................................... 5-183
5.4.6 Native Command Queuing protocol................................................ 5-184
5.5 Power-on and COMRESET......................................................................... 5-187
CHAPTER 6 Operations................................................................................. 6-1
6.1 Reset and Diagnosis......................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.1 Response to power-on.......................................................................... 6-2
6.1.2 Response to COMRESET.................................................................... 6-4
6.1.3 Response to a software reset................................................................ 6-7
6.2 Power Save....................................................................................................... 6-8
6.2.1 Power save mode ................................................................................. 6-8
6.2.2 Power commands............................................................................... 6-10
6.3 Power Save Controlled by Interface Power Management (IPM)................... 6-11
6.3.1 Power save mode of the interface...................................................... 6-11
C141-E280
xiii
Contents
6.4 Read-ahead Cache..........................................................................................6-13
6.4.1 Data buffer structure ..........................................................................6-13
6.4.2 Caching operation ..............................................................................6-14
6.4.3 Using the read segment buffer ...........................................................6-16
6.5 Write Cache....................................................................................................6-20
6.5.1 Cache operation .................................................................................6-20
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance and Diagnosis .....................................................7-1
7.1 Maintenance .....................................................................................................7-2
7.1.1 Rules for maintenance..........................................................................7-2
7.1.2 Maintenance requirements...................................................................7-3
7.1.3 Maintenance levels...............................................................................7-5
7.1.4 Disk drive revision number..................................................................7-6
7.1.5 Tools and test equipment .....................................................................7-8
7.1.6 Self-diagnostics....................................................................................7-8
7.1.7 Test.......................................................................................................7-8
7.2 Operation Confirmation .................................................................................7-11
7.2.1 Operation test.....................................................................................7-11
7.2.2 Diagnostic test....................................................................................7-11
7.3 Troubleshooting Procedure ............................................................................7-12
7.3.1 Troubleshooting procedure ................................................................7-12
7.3.2 Troubleshooting disk drive replaced in field .....................................7-12
7.3.3 Troubleshooting at factory.................................................................7-14
7.4 Disk Drive Removal Procedure......................................................................7-15
7.5 Spare Disk Drive ............................................................................................7-15
Glossary ...........................................................................................................GL-1
Acronyms and Abbreviations.........................................................................AB-1
Index ................................................................................................................. IN-1
xiv
C141-E280
Contents
Illustrations
Figures
Figure 1.1 Permissible range of +5V rise slope................................................... 1-8
Figure 1.2 The example of negative voltage waveform at +5 V when
power is turned off ............................................................................. 1-9
Figure 1.3 Current fluctuation (Typ.) at +5 V when power is turned on........... 1-11
Figure 2.1 Disk drive outerview.......................................................................... 2-2
Figure 2.2 Drive system configuration ................................................................ 2-3
Figure 3.1 Dimensions......................................................................................... 3-2
Figure 3.2 Mounting frame structure................................................................... 3-4
Figure 3.3 Location of breather ........................................................................... 3-5
Figure 3.4 Surface cover temperature measurement points................................. 3-6
Figure 3.5 Service area ........................................................................................ 3-7
Figure 3.6 Handling cautions............................................................................... 3-8
Figure 3.7 Connector locations............................................................................ 3-9
Figure 3.8 Power supply pins (CN1)................................................................. 3-10
Figure 4.1 Power supply configuration ............................................................... 4-4
Figure 4.2 Circuit configuration .......................................................................... 4-5
Figure 4.3 Power-on operation sequence............................................................. 4-7
Figure 4.4 Read/write circuit block diagram ..................................................... 4-10
Figure 4.5 Block diagram of servo control circuit............................................. 4-12
Figure 4.6 Physical sector servo configuration on disk surface ........................ 4-15
Figure 4.7 Servo frame format........................................................................... 4-16
Figure 5.1 Interface signals.................................................................................. 5-2
Figure 5.2 Example of the circuit for driving Activity LED ............................... 5-9
Figure 5.3 Conceptual diagram of communication layers................................. 5-11
Figure 5.4 Register - Host to Device FIS layout................................................ 5-15
Figure 5.5 Register - Device to Host FIS layout................................................ 5-16
Figure 5.6 DMA Active - Device to Host FIS layout........................................ 5-16
Figure 5.7 DMA Setup - Device to Host or Host to Device FIS layout ............ 5-17
Figure 5.8 BIST Active - Bidirectional FIS layout............................................ 5-18
Figure 5.9 Data FIS (Bidirectional) layout........................................................ 5-19
Figure 5.10 PIO Setup - Device to Host FIS layout ............................................ 5-19
Figure 5.11 Set Device Bits FIS .......................................................................... 5-21
C141-E280
xv
Contents
Figure 5.12 Execution example of READ MULTIPLE command......................5-90
Figure 5.13 Non-data command protocol ..........................................................5-177
Figure 5.14 PIO data-in command protocol.......................................................5-179
Figure 5.15 PIO data-out command protocol.....................................................5-181
Figure 5.16 DMA data-in command protocol....................................................5-182
Figure 5.17 DMA data-out command protocol..................................................5-183
Figure 5.18 READ FP DMA QUEUED command protocol.............................5-185
Figure 5.19 WRITE FP DMA QUEUED command protocol ...........................5-186
Figure 5.20 Power-on sequence.........................................................................5-187
Figure 5.21 COMRESET sequence ...................................................................5-188
Figure 6.1 Response to power-on (when the host is powered on
earlier than the device) .......................................................................6-2
Figure 6.2 Response to power-on (when the device is powered on
earlier than the host) ...........................................................................6-3
Figure 6.3 Response to COMRESET ..................................................................6-4
Figure 6.4 Response to a software reset...............................................................6-7
Figure 6.5 Data buffer structure.........................................................................6-13
Figure 7.1 Disk drive revision number label........................................................7-6
Figure 7.2 Display of disk drive revision number ...............................................7-7
Figure 7.3 Test flowchart.....................................................................................7-9
xvi
C141-E280
Contents
Tables
Table 1.1 Specifications ..................................................................................... 1-5
Table 1.2 Examples of model names and product numbers............................... 1-7
Table 1.3 Current and power dissipation.......................................................... 1-10
Table 1.4 Environmental specifications ........................................................... 1-11
Table 1.5 Acoustic noise specification............................................................. 1-12
Table 1.6 Shock and vibration specification .................................................... 1-12
Table 1.7 Advanced Power Management......................................................... 1-16
Table 1.8 Interface power management ........................................................... 1-18
Table 3.1 Surface temperature measurement points and standard
values.................................................................................................. 3-6
Table 5.1 Connector pinouts .............................................................................. 5-7
Table 5.2 Requirements for P11 as an output pin .............................................. 5-9
Table 5.3 Shadow Block Register .................................................................... 5-13
Table 5.4 BIST combinations........................................................................... 5-18
Table 5.5 Command code and parameters ....................................................... 5-27
Table 5.6 Diagnostic code................................................................................ 5-41
Table 5.7 Operation of DOWNLOAD MICROCODE .................................... 5-44
Table 5.8 Example of rewriting procedure of data 640K Bytes
(A0000h Bytes) of microcode......................................................... 5-45
Table 5.9 Features Field values (subcommands) and functions....................... 5-55
Table 5.10 Format of device attribute value data............................................... 5-59
Table 5.11 Format of guarantee failure threshold value data............................. 5-59
Table 5.12 Off-line data collection status........................................................... 5-62
Table 5.13 Self-test execution status.................................................................. 5-62
Table 5.14 Off-line data collection capability.................................................... 5-63
Table 5.15 Failure prediction capability flag ..................................................... 5-63
Table 5.16 Drive error logging capability.......................................................... 5-64
Table 5.17 Log Directory Data Format.............................................................. 5-64
Table 5.18 Data format of SMART Summary Error Log .................................. 5-65
Table 5.19 Data format of SMART Comprehensive Error Log......................... 5-67
Table 5.20 SMART self-test log data format..................................................... 5-68
Table 5.21 Selective self-test log data structure................................................. 5-69
Table 5.22 Selective self-test feature flags......................................................... 5-70
Table 5.23 SCT command and the function....................................................... 5-71
Table 5.24 Format of SCT STATUS Response ................................................. 5-73
Table 5.25 SCT STATUS code.......................................................................... 5-75
Table 5.26 Action code ...................................................................................... 5-77
C141-E280
xvii
Contents
Table 5.27 WRITE SAME .................................................................................5-77
Table 5.28 ERROR RECOVERY CONTROL...................................................5-78
Table 5.29 FEATURE CONTROL COMMAND..............................................5-79
Table 5.30 SCT DATA TABLE.........................................................................5-80
Table 5.31 HDA Temperature............................................................................5-81
Table 5.32 DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY data structure................5-87
Table 5.33 Information to be read by IDENTIFY DEVICE command............5-105
Table 5.34 Features field values and settable modes........................................5-119
Table 5.35 Contents of SECURITY SET PASSWORD data...........................5-126
Table 5.36 Relationship between combination of Identifier and
Security level, and operation of the lock function.........................5-126
Table 5.37 Contents of security password........................................................5-128
Table 5.38 Contents of Security Erase Unit Password.....................................5-131
Table 5.39 Data format of Read Log Ext log page 10h....................................5-150
Table 5.40 Tag field information......................................................................5-150
Table 5.41 Data format of Read Log Ext log page 11h....................................5-151
Table 5.42 Counter Identifier information .......................................................5-151
Table 5.43 Operation mode ..............................................................................5-166
Table 5.44 Command code and parameters......................................................5-173
Table 7.1 Status Field contents.........................................................................7-10
Table 7.2 Disposition for Error Field contents.................................................7-10
Table 7.3 System level and field troubleshooting ............................................7-13
xviii
C141-E280
CHAPTER 1 Device Overview
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
Features
Device Specifications
Power Requirements
Environmental Specifications
Acoustic Noise
Shock and Vibration
Reliability
Error Rate
Media Defects
1.10 Load/Unload Function
1.11 Advanced Power Management (APM)
1.12 Interface Power Management (IPM)
Overview and features are described in this chapter, and specifications and power
requirement are described.
The disk drive is 2.5-inch hard disk drives with built-in disk controllers. These
disk drives use the SATA interface protocol which has a high-speed interface data
transfer rate.
C141-E280
1-1
Device Overview
1.1 Features
1.1.1 Functions and performance
The following features of the disk drive are described.
(1) Compact
The disk drive has up to 2 disks of 65 mm (2.5 inches) diameter, and its height is
9.5 mm (0.374 inch).
(2) Environmental Protection
The disk drive complies with the Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous
Substances in electrical and electronic equipment (RoHS) directive issued by
European Union (EU).
(3) Large capacity
The disk drive can record up to 160 GB (formatted) on one disk using the RLL
recording method and 30 recording zone technology. The disk drive has a
formatted capacity of 320 GB (MHZ2320BJ), 250 GB (MHZ2250BJ),
200 GB (MHZ2200BJ), 160 GB (MHZ2160BJ), 120 GB (MHZ2120BJ), and
80 GB (MHZ2080BJ) respectively.
(4) High-speed Transfer rate
The disk drive (the MHZ2xxxBJ Series) has an internal data rate up to
118.4 MB/s. The disk drive supports an external data rate 3.0 Gbps (300 MB/s)
(Serial-ATA Generation-2) or 1.5 Gbps (150 MB/s) (Serial-ATA Generation-1) by
each model. And the disk drive realizes a high performance by high-speed
transfer rate combined with Native Command Queuing (NCQ).
(5) Average positioning time
Use of a rotary voice coil motor in the head positioning mechanism greatly increases
the positioning speed. The average positioning time is 10.5 ms (at read).
1.1.2 Adaptability
(1) Power save mode
The disk drive is ideal for applications since it supports the power save mode
function that works in each of the Idle, Standby, and Sleep modes and has the
Partial and Slumber interface power management functions. And automatically
power down by APM function makes the disk drive ideal for mobile use where
power consumption is a factor.
1-2
C141-E280
1.1 Features
(2) Wide temperature range
The disk drive can be used over a wide temperature range (5 °C to 60 °C at DE
surface).
(3) Low noise and vibration
In Ready status (while the device is waiting for any commands), the Sound Power
level of the disk drives in idle mode is 2.0 B [MHZ2160BJ/MHZ2120BJ/
MHZ2080BJ] / 2.5 B [MHZ2320BJ/MHZ2250BJ/ MHZ2200BJ]. The Sound
Pressure level is 23 dB [MHZ2160BJ/MHZ2120BJ/ MHZ2080BJ] / 29 dB
[MHZ2320BJ/MHZ2250BJ/ MHZ2200BJ], as measured 0.3 m from the drive in
Idle mode.
(4) High resistance against shock
The Load/Unload mechanism is highly resistant against non-operation shock up to
8820 m/s2 (900G).
1.1.3 Interface
(1) Connection to SATA interface
The disk drive has built-in controllers compatible with the SATA interface.
(2) Data buffer
The disk drive uses the data buffer to transfer data between the host and the disk
media.
In combination with the read-ahead cache system described in item (3) and the
write cache described in item (6), the buffer contributes to efficient I/O processing.
(3) Read-ahead cache system
After the execution of a disk read command, the disk drive automatically reads the
subsequent data block and writes it to the data buffer (read ahead operation). This
cache system enables fast data access. The next disk read command would normally
cause another disk access. But, if the read ahead data corresponds to the data
requested by the next read command, the data in the buffer can be transferred instead.
(4) Error correction and retry by ECC
If a recoverable error occurs, the disk drive itself attempts error recovery. The
ECC has improved buffer error correction for correctable data errors.
(5) Self-diagnosis
The disk drive has a diagnostic function to check operation of the controller and disk
drive. Executing a diagnostic function of the smart command invokes self-diagnosis.
C141-E280
1-3
Device Overview
(6) Write cache
When the disk drive receives a write command, the disk drive posts the command
completion at completion of transferring data to the data buffer completion of
writing to the disk media. This feature reduces the access time at writing.
1-4
C141-E280
1.2 Device Specifications
1.2 Device Specifications
1.2.1 Specifications summary
Table 1.1 shows the specifications of the disk drives.
Table 1.1 Specifications (1/2)
MHZ2320BJ
320 GB
MHZ2250BJ
250 GB
MHZ2200BJ
200 GB
MHZ2160BJ
160 GB
MHZ2120BJ
120 GB
MHZ2080BJ
80 GB
Format Capacity (*1, *2)
Number of Sectors (User)
Bytes per Sector
625,142,448
488,397,168
390,721,968
312,581,808
234,441,648
156,301,488
512 bytes
Rotational Speed
7,200 rpm ± 1%
Average Latency
4.17 ms
Positioning time
(read and seek)
•
•
•
Minimum (Track-Track)
Average
1.5 ms (typ.)
Read: 10.5 ms (typ.)
20.5 ms (typ.)
Maximum (Full)
Start time
4.0 sec (typ.)
Interface
Compliant with ATA8-ACS, Serial ATA Revision 2.6 Gen1i and Gen2i
Data Transfer Rate (*3)
•
•
To/From Media
118.4 MB/s Max.
1.5 Gbps (150 MB/s) (Gen1i) [1.5 Gbps model]
1.5 Gbps (150 MB/s) (Gen1i)/3.0 Gbps (300 MB/s) (Gen2i) [3.0 Gbps model]
16 MB (16,777,216 bytes)
To/From Host (*4)
Data Buffer Size (*5)
Physical Dimensions
9.5 mm × 100.0 mm × 70.0 mm (*6)
(Height × Width × Depth)
Weight
115 g (Max.)
107 g (Max.)
*1: Capacity under the LBA mode.
*2: One gigabyte (GB) = one billion bytes and One megabyte (MB) = one million bytes; accessible
capacity will be less and actual capacity depends on the operating environment and formatting.
*3: 1 GB is equal to 1,000,000,000 bytes and 1 MB is equal to 1,000,000 bytes.
*4: 1.5 Gbps model does not support 3.0 Gbps.
*5: 1 MB is equal to 1,048,576 bytes; the actual buffer capacity for data transfer will be less.
Refer to the Section 6.4 of this manual.
*6: The value of Depth (=100.0 mm) does not include PCBA (Printed Circuit Board Assembly).
For details, see Section 3.1.
C141-E280
1-5
Device Overview
Table 1.1 lists the formatted capacity, number of logical cylinders, number of
heads, and number of sectors of every model for which the CHS mode has been
selected using the BIOS setup utility on the host.
Table 1.1 Specifications (2/2)
Model
Capacity (*1)
No. of Cylinder
No. of Heads
No. of Sectors
MHZ2320BJ
MHZ2250BJ
MHZ2200BJ
MHZ2160BJ
MHZ2120BJ
MHZ2080BJ
8.45 GB
8.45 GB
8.45 GB
8.45 GB
8.45 GB
8.45 GB
16,383
16,383
16,383
16,383
16,383
16,383
16
16
16
16
16
16
63
63
63
63
63
63
*1: One gigabyte (GB) = one billion bytes; accessible capacity will be less and actual capacity
depends on the operating environment and formatting.
1-6
C141-E280
1.2 Device Specifications
1.2.2 Model and product number
Table 1.2 lists the model names and product numbers of the disk drive.
The model name does not necessarily correspond to the product number as listed
in Table 1.2 since some models have been customized and have specifications that
are different from those for the standard model.
If a disk drive is ordered as a replacement drive, the product number must be the
same as that of the drive being replaced.
Table 1.2 Examples of model names and product numbers
Capacity (*1)
(user area)
Model Name
MHZ2320BJ
MHZ2250BJ
MHZ2200BJ
MHZ2160BJ
MHZ2120BJ
MHZ2080BJ
Mounting screw
M3 Depth 3
M3 Depth 3
M3 Depth 3
M3 Depth 3
M3 Depth 3
M3 Depth 3
Order No.
CA07096-B042 (1.5 Gbps model)
CA07096-B072 (3.0 Gbps model) (*2)
320 GB
CA07096-B045 (1.5 Gbps model)
CA07096-B075 (3.0 Gbps model) (*2)
250 GB
200 GB
160 GB
120 GB
80 GB
CA07096-B030 (1.5 Gbps model)
CA07096-B060 (3.0 Gbps model) (*2)
CA07096-B026 (1.5 Gbps model)
CA07096-B056 (3.0 Gbps model) (*2)
CA07096-B022 (1.5 Gbps model)
CA07096-B052 (3.0 Gbps model) (*2)
CA07096-B018 (1.5 Gbps model)
CA07096-B048 (3.0 Gbps model) (*2)
*1: One gigabyte (GB) = one billion bytes; accessible capacity will be less and actual capacity
depends on the operating environment and formatting.
*2: Serial ATA Generation-1 (1.5 Gbps) is also supported.
C141-E280
1-7
Device Overview
1.3 Power Requirements
(1) Input Voltage
•
•
+ 5 V ± 5 %
It is unnecessary for this drive to supply +3.3 V and +12 V power supplies.
(2) Ripple
+5 V
Maximum
Frequency
100 mV (peak to peak)
DC to 1 MHz
(3) Slope of an input voltage at rise
The following figure shows the restriction of the slope which is +5 V input voltage
at rise. The permissible range of +5 V slope is from 1V/20 µsec to 1V/20 msec,
under the voltage range is between 2.0V and 4.5V.
Figure 1.1 Permissible range of +5V rise slope
1-8
C141-E280
1.3 Power Requirements
(4) A negative voltage like the bottom figure isn't to occur at +5 V when power is turned off
and, a thing with no ringing.
Permissible level: − 0.2 V
5
4
3
2
1
0
-1
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
Time [ms]
Figure 1.2 The example of negative voltage waveform at +5 V
when power is turned off
C141-E280
1-9
Device Overview
(5) Current Requirements and Power Dissipation
Table 1.3 lists the current and power dissipation (typical).
Table 1.3 Current and power dissipation
Typical RMS Current Typical Power (*3)
SATA interface
transfer speed
Gen1 (1.5 Gbps)
Gen2 (3.0 Gbps)
Gen1 (1.5 Gbps)
Gen2 (3.0 Gbps)
Spin up (*1)
Idle (*6)
1.1 A
1.1 A
5.5 W
5.5 W
160 mA
160 mA
0.80 W
0.80 W
R/W (on track)
(*2)
420 mA
460 mA
2.1 W
2.3 W
Seek (*5)
460 mA
26 mA
26 mA
500 mA
26 mA
26 mA
2.3 W
0.13 W
0.13 W
2.5 W
0.13 W
0.13 W
Standby (*6)
Sleep (*6)
e rank (0.0025 W/GB): MHZ2320BJ
e rank (0.0032 W/GB): MHZ2250BJ
e rank (0.0040 W/GB): MHZ2200BJ
d rank (0.0050 W/GB): MHZ2160BJ
d rank (0.0067 W/GB): MHZ2120BJ
d rank (0.0100 W/GB): MHZ2080BJ
Energy
Efficiency (*4)
⎯
*1
*2
Maximum current and power at starting spindle motor.
Current and power level when the operation (command) that accompanies a
transfer of 63 sectors is executed 3 times in 100 ms
*3
*4
Power requirements reflect typical values for +5 V power.
Energy efficiency based on the Law concerning the Rational Use of Energy
indicates the value obtained by dividing power consumption by the storage
capacity. (Japan only)
*5
*6
The seek average current is specified based on three operations per 100
msec.
IPM mode: Slumber mode.
1-10
C141-E280
1.4 Environmental Specifications
(6) Current fluctuation (Typ.) at +5 V when power is turned on
Figure 1.3 Current fluctuation (Typ.) at +5 V when power is turned on
1.4 Environmental Specifications
Table 1.4 lists the environmental specifications.
Table 1.4 Environmental specifications
Item
Specification
Temperature
• Operating
5 °C to 55 °C (ambient)
5 °C to 60 °C (disk enclosure surface)
–40 °C to 65 °C
• Non-operating
• Thermal Gradient
Humidity
20 °C/h or less
• Operating
• Non-operating
• Maximum Wet Bulb
8 % to 90 % RH (Non-condensing)
5 % to 95 % RH (Non-condensing)
29 °C (Operating)
40 °C (Non-operating)
Altitude (relative to sea level)
• Operating
• Non-operating
–300 to 3,000 m
–300 to 12,000 m
C141-E280
1-11
Device Overview
1.5 Acoustic Noise
Table 1.5 lists the acoustic noise specification.
Table 1.5 Acoustic noise specification
Item
• Idle mode (DRIVE READY)
Specification
Sound Power
2.0 B [MHZ2160BJ/MHZ2120BJ/MHZ2080BJ]
2.5 B [MHZ2320BJ/MHZ2250BJ/MHZ2200BJ]
Sound Pressure (at 0.3m)
23 dB [MHZ2160BJ/MHZ2120BJ/MHZ2080BJ]
29 dB [MHZ2320BJ/MHZ2250BJ/MHZ2200BJ]
Note:
Measure the noise from the cover top surface.
1.6 Shock and Vibration
Table 1.6 lists the shock and vibration specification.
Table 1.6 Shock and vibration specification
Item
Specification
Vibration (Swept sine, 1/4 octave per minute)
• Operating
5 to 500 Hz, 9.8m/s2 0-peak (1G 0-peak)
(without non-recovered errors)
Non-operating
5 to 500 Hz, 49m/s2 0-peak (5G 0-peak)
(no damage)
Shock (half-sine pulse)
• Operating
3185 m/s2 0-peak (325G 0-peak)
2ms duration
(without non-recovered errors)
• Non-operating
8820 m/s2 0-peak (900G 0-peak)
1ms duration
1176 m/s2 0-peak (120G 0-peak)
11ms duration
(no damage)
1-12
C141-E280
1.7 Reliability
1.7 Reliability
(1) Mean time between failures (MTBF)
Conditions of 300,000 h Power-on time 250H/month or less 3000H/years
or less
Operating time 20 % or less of power-on time
Temperature
Humidity
5 to 60 °C (Disk Enclosure surface)
8 to 90 % (ambient)
But humidity bulb temperature
29 °C or less
MTBF is defined as follows:
Total operation time in all fields
MTBF=
(H)
number of device failure in all fields (*1)
*1 "Disk drive defects" refers to defects that involve repair, readjustment, or
replacement. Disk drive defects do not include failures caused by external factors,
such as damage caused by handling, inappropriate operating environments, defects
in the power supply host system, or interface cable.
(2) Mean time to repair (MTTR)
The mean time to repair (MTTR) is 30 minutes or less, if repaired by a specialist
maintenance staff member.
(3) Service life
In situations where management and handling are correct, the disk drive requires
no overhaul for five years when the DE surface temperature is less than 48 °C.
When the DE surface temperature exceeds 48 °C, the disk drives require no
overhaul for five years or 20,000 hours of operation, whichever occurs first. Refer
to item (3) in Subsection 3.2 for the measurement point of the DE surface
temperature. The operating conditions of Service life are based on the equal
conditions with MTBF.
(4) Data assurance in the event of power failure
Except for the data block being written to, the data on the disk media is assured in
the event of any power supply abnormalities. This does not include power supply
abnormalities during disk media initialization (formatting) or processing of defects
(alternative block assignment).
C141-E280
1-13
Device Overview
1.8 Error Rate
Known defects, for which alternative blocks can be assigned, are not included in
the error rate count below. It is assumed that the data blocks to be accessed are
evenly distributed on the disk media.
(1) Unrecoverable read error
Read errors that cannot be recovered by maximum read retries of drive without
user's retry and ECC corrections shall occur no more than 1 time when reading
data of 1014 bits. Read retries are executed according to the disk drive's error
recovery procedure, and include read retries accompanying head offset operations.
(2) Positioning error
Positioning (seek) errors that can be recovered by one retry shall occur no more
than 1 time in 107 seek operations.
1.9 Media Defects
Defective sectors are replaced with alternates when the disk drive is formatted
prior to shipment from the factory (low level format). Thus, the hosts see a defect-
free device.
Alternate sectors are automatically accessed by the disk drive. The user need not
be concerned with access to alternate sectors.
1.10 Load/Unload Function
The Load/Unload function is a mechanism that loads the head on the disk and
unloads the head from the disk.
The product supports a minimum of 600,000 Load/Unload cycles.
Unload is a normal head unloading operation and the commands listed below are
executed.
•
•
•
•
•
STANDBY command issued
STANDBY IMMEDIATE command issued
SLEEP command issued
IDLE IMMEDIATE command (with unload feature) issued
Power Mode shifted with APM or APS feature.
Emergency Unload other than Unload is performed when the power is shut down
while the heads are still loaded on the disk.
The product supports the Emergency Unload a minimum of 20,000 times.
1-14
C141-E280
1.11 Advanced Power Management (APM)
When the power is shut down, the controlled Unload cannot be executed.
Therefore, the number of Emergency other than Unload is specified.
1.10.1 Recommended power-off sequence
We recommend cutting the power supply of the HDD for this device after the
Head Unload operation completes. The recommended power supply cutting
sequence for this device is as follows:
1) Disk Flush
Flush Cache command execution.
2) Head Unload
Standby Immediate command execution.
3) Wait Status
Checking whether bit 7 of the status register was set to '0'.
(wait to complete STANDBY IMMEDIATE command)
4) HDD power supply cutting
1.11 Advanced Power Management (APM)
The disk drive automatically shifts to the power saving mode according to the
setting of the APM mode under the idle condition.
The APM mode can be chosen with a Sector Count register of the SET
FEATURES (EF) command.
The disk drive complies with the three kinds of APM modes that a command from
the host is required.
FR = 05h : Enable APM
SC = C0h - FEh :
SC = 80h - BFh :
SC = 01h - 7Fh :
Mode-0 Active Idle → Low Power Idle
Mode-1 Active Idle → Low Power Idle (Default)
Mode-2 Active Idle → Low Power Idle → Standby
FR = 85h : Disable APM (Set Mode-0)
C141-E280
1-15
Device Overview
Active Idle:
The head is in a position of extreme inner in disk
medium. (VCM Lock)
Low Power Idle:
Standby:
The head is unloaded from disk.
The spindle motor rotates.
The spindle motor stops.
In APM Mode-1, which is the APM default mode, the operation status shifts till it
finally reaches "Low Power Idle."
Table 1.7 Advanced Power Management
Active Idle
(VCM Lock)
Low Power Idle
(Unload)
Standby
(Spin Off)
APM Mode
Mode-0
Mode-1
Mode-2
0.2-1.2 sec
0.1-0.2 sec
0.1-0.2 sec
15 min.
N/A
N/A
10.0-27.5 sec
10.0-27.5 sec
10.0-40.0 sec
When the maximum time that the HDD is waiting for commands has been
exceeded:
Mode-0: Mode shifts from Active condition to Active Idle in 0.2-1.2, and to Low
Power Idle in 15 minutes.
Mode-1: Mode shifts from Active condition to Active Idle in 0.1-0.2 seconds and
to Low Power Idle in 10.0-27.5 seconds.
Mode-2: Mode shifts from Active condition to Active Idle in 0.1-0.2 seconds and
to Low Power Idle in 10.0-27.5 seconds. After 10.0-40.0 seconds in
Low Power Idle, the mode shifts to standby.
Remark:
The default values of these settings are reflected in the WORD 91 values of the
IDENTIFY DEVICE command. Also, the APM mode is initialized to Mode-1
(default value) at power-off.
The above mentioned is time until shifting to each power mode based on point that
the drive becomes a command waiting state.
1-16
C141-E280
1.12 Interface Power Management (IPM)
1.12 Interface Power Management (IPM)
1.12.1 Host-initiated interface power management (HIPM)
When the disk drive is waiting for commands, it can enter one of three IPM modes
as requested by the host. The three IPM modes are:
1) Partial mode: PMREQ_P is sent when the host requests the Partial mode.
2) Slumber mode: PMREQ_S is sent when the host requests the Slumber mode.
3) Active mode: When the serial ATA interface is in active state.
There are three interface (I/F) power states: Active, Partial, and Slumber. As
requested by the host, the disk drive switches its I/F power state from the Active
state to the Partial state, or from the Active state to the Slumber state.
1.12.2 Device-initiated interface power management (DIPM)
If this function is enabled by Set Features command, the disk drive shifts to two
kinds of IPM modes automatically under the Idle condition.
1) Partial mode: PMREQ_P is sent when the disk drive requests the Partial
mode.
2) Slumber mode: PMREQ_S is sent when the disk drive requests the Slumber
mode.
I/F power states
1) Active state
The SATA interface is active, and data can be sent and received.
2) Partial state
The SATA interface is in the Power Down state. In this state, the interface is
switched to the Partial state when a PMREQ_P signal is received from or sent
to host. Because the return time to the Active state from the Partial state is
specified as within 10 µs, the degree of the I/F Power Save mode is shallow
so that this recovery time is satisfied.
3) Slumber state
The SATA interface is in the Power Down state. In this state, the interface is
switched to the Slumber state when a PMREQ_S signal is received from or
sent to host. Because the return time to the Active state from the Slumber
state is specified as within 10 ms, the degree of the I/F Power Save mode is
deep so that this recovery time is satisfied.
C141-E280
1-17
Device Overview
Table 1.8 Interface power management
IPM Mode
I/F power state
Active State
Partial State
Return time to active
−
I/F condition
Active
Active
Partial
Power Down
Power Down
5 to 10 µs maximum
5 to 10 ms maximum
Slumber
Slumber State
1-18
C141-E280
CHAPTER 2 Device Configuration
2.1
2.2
Device Configuration
System Configuration
This chapter describes the internal configurations of the hard disk drives and the
configuration of the systems in which they operate.
C141-E280
2-1
Device Configuration
2.1 Device Configuration
Figure 2.1 shows the disk drive. The disk drive consists of a disk enclosure (DE),
read/write preamplifier, and controller PCA. The disk enclosure contains the disk
media, heads, spindle motor, actuator, and a circulating air filter.
Figure 2.1 Disk drive outerview
(1) Disk
The outer diameter of the disk is 65 mm. The inner diameter is 20 mm.
(2) Head
The heads are of the load/unload (L/UL) type. The head unloads the disk out of
while the disk is not rotating and loads on the disk when the disk starts.
(3) Spindle motor
The disks are rotated by a direct drive Sensor-less DC motor.
(4) Actuator
The actuator uses a revolving voice coil motor (VCM) structure which consumes
low power and generates very little heat. The head assembly at the edge of the
actuator arm is controlled and positioned by feedback of the servo information
read by the read/write head. If the power is not on or if the spindle motor is
stopped, the head assembly stays on the ramp out of the disk and is fixed by a
mechanical lock.
2-2
C141-E280
2.2 System Configuration
(5) Air circulation system
The disk enclosure (DE) is sealed to prevent dust and dirt from entering. The
disk enclosure features a closed loop air circulation system that relies on the
blower effect of the rotating disk. This system continuously circulates the air
through the circulation filter to maintain the cleanliness of the air within the disk
enclosure.
(6) Read/write circuit
The read/write circuit uses a LSI chip for the read/write preamplifier. It improves
data reliability by preventing errors caused by external noise.
(7) Controller circuit
The controller circuit supports Serial-ATA interface, and it realized a high
performance by integration into LSI.
2.2 System Configuration
2.2.1 SATA interface
Figure 2.2 shows the SATA interface system configuration. The disk drive
complies with ATA8-ACS, Serial ATA Revision 2.6 (Gen1i or Gen2i by each
model).
2.2.2 Drive connection
Operating System
Serial
ATA
Adapter
Application 1
Disk Drive
Disk Drive
Driver
Application 2
Application 3
Figure 2.2 Drive system configuration
C141-E280
2-3
This page is intentionally left blank.
CHAPTER 3 Installation Conditions
3.1
3.2
3.3
Dimensions
Mounting
Connections with Host System
This chapter gives the external dimensions, installation conditions, surface
temperature conditions, cable connections, and switch settings of the hard disk
drives.
C141-E280
3-1
Installation Conditions
3.1 Dimensions
Figure 3.1 illustrates the dimensions of the disk drive. All dimensions are in mm.
*1
*2
*3
*4
The PCA and connectors are not included in these dimensions.
Dimension from the center of the user tap to the base of the connector pins
Length of the connector pins
Dimension from the outer edge of the user tap to the center of the connector
pins
*5
Dimension from the outer edge of the user tap to the innermost edge of the
connector pins
Figure 3.1 Dimensions
3-2
C141-E280
3.2 Mounting
3.2 Mounting
For information on mounting, see the "FUJITSU 2.5-INCH HDD INTEGRATION
GUIDANCE (C141-E144)."
(1) Orientation
(2) Frame
The disk drives can be mounted in any direction.
The MR head bias of the HDD disk enclosure (DE) is zero. The mounting frame
is connected to Signal Ground (SG).
Use M3 screw for the mounting screw and the screw length should
satisfy the specification in Figure 3.2.
The tightening torque must be 0.49N•m (5kgf•cm).
When attaching the HDD to the system frame, do not allow the
system frame to touch parts (cover and base) other than parts to
which the HDD is attached.
C141-E280
3-3
Installation Conditions
(3) Limitation of mounting
Note) These dimensions are recommended values; if it is not possible to satisfy
them, contact us.
Side surface
mounting
2.5
2.5
Bottom surface mounting
DE
2.5
2.5
2
B
PCA
Frame of system
cabinet
A
Frame of system
cabinet
3.0 or less
Details of A
Screw
Screw
3.0 or less
Figure 3.2 Mounting frame structure
3-4
C141-E280
3.2 Mounting
Because of breather hole mounted to the HDD, do not allow this to
close during mounting.
Locating of breather hole is shown as Figure 3.3.
For breather hole of Figure 3.3, at least, do not allow its around φ 3
to block.
Figure 3.3 Location of breather
C141-E280
3-5
Installation Conditions
(4) Ambient temperature
The temperature conditions for a disk drive mounted in a cabinet refer to the
ambient temperature at a point 3 cm from the disk drive. The ambient temperature
must satisfy the temperature conditions described in Section 1.4, and the airflow
must be considered to prevent the DE surface cover temperature from exceeding
60 °C.
Provide air circulation in the cabinet such that the PCA side, in particular, receives
sufficient cooling. To check the cooling efficiency, measure the surface cover
temperatures of the DE. Regardless of the ambient temperature, this surface cover
temperature must meet the standards listed in Table 3.1. Figure 3.4 shows the
temperature measurement point.
1
Figure 3.4 Surface cover temperature measurement points
Table 3.1 Surface temperature measurement points and standard values
No.
1
Measurement point
DE cover
Temperature
60 °C max
3-6
C141-E280
3.2 Mounting
(5) Service area
Figure 3.5 shows how the drive must be accessed (service areas) during and after
installation.
Mounting screw hole
Cable connection
Mounting screw hole
Figure 3.5 Service area
Data corruption: Avoid mounting the disk drive near strong
magnetic sources such as loud speakers. Ensure that the disk drive
is not affected by external magnetic fields.
Damage: Do not press the cover of the disk drive. Pressing it too
hard, the cover and the spindle motor contact, which may cause
damage to the disk drive.
Static: When handling the device, disconnect the body ground
(500 kΩ or greater). Do not touch the printed circuit board, but hold
it by the edges.
(6) Handling cautions
Please keep the following cautions, and handle the HDD under the safety
environment.
C141-E280
3-7
Installation Conditions
-
General notes
ESD mat
Shock absorbing mat
Wrist strap
Use the Wrist strap.
Place the shock absorbing mat on the
operation table, and place ESD mat on it.
Do not hit HDD each other.
Do not stack when carrying.
Do not place HDD vertically
to avoid falling down.
Do not drop.
Figure 3.6 Handling cautions
-
-
Installation
(1) Please use the driver of a low impact when you use an electric driver.
HDD is occasionally damaged by the impact of the driver.
(2) Please observe the tightening torque of the screw strictly.
M3 ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ 0.49N • m (5 kgf • cm).
Recommended equipments
Contents
Wrist strap
Model
JX-1200-3056-8
SKY-8A (Color Seiden Mat)
SS-6500
Maker
SUMITOMO 3M
Achilles
ESD
ESD mat
Shock
Low shock driver
HIOS
3-8
C141-E280
3.3 Connections with Host System
3.3 Connections with Host System
3.3.1 Device connector
The disk drive has the SATA interface connectors listed below for connecting
external devices. Figure 3.7 shows the locations of these connectors and
terminals.
SATA interface
and power
connectors
PCA
Figure 3.7 Connector locations
C141-E280
3-9
Installation Conditions
3.3.2 Signal segment and power supply segment
Figure 3.8 shows each segment of the SATA interface connector and pin numbers.
View from the
connector side
Power supply
segment
Signal segment
View from the
PCA side
S1 pins in the signal
segment
P1 pins in the power
supply segment
Figure 3.8 Power supply pins (CN1)
3.3.3 Connector specifications for host system
The connector of host system for mating with the disk drive must be compliant
with Serial-ATA Revision 2.5 specification. For detail of requirements about
SATA interface connector, refer to the "Serial-ATA Revision 2.6."
The connection reliability per number of insertion/extractions varies
with the condition of the connection with the host system.
Therefore, we recommend that the customer evaluate the connector
on the customer's system and select it from the connectors
complying with the Serial ATA Revision 2.6 specification.
3-10
C141-E280
3.3 Connections with Host System
3.3.4 SATA interface cable connection
The cable that connects the disk drive to the host system must be compliant with
the Serial ATA Revision 2.6 specification.
3.3.5 Note about SATA interface cable connection
Take note of the following precaution about plugging a SATA interface cable into
the SATA interface connector of the disk drive and plugging the connector into a
host receptacle:
When plugging together the disk drive SATA interface connector
and the host receptacle or SATA interface cable connector, do not
apply more than 10 kgf of force in the connection direction once
they are snugly and securely in position.
Connecting/removing the cable without releasing the SATA
interface Latch may lead to connector damage and the loss of the
Latch function. Accordingly, be sure to connect/remove the cable
while releasing the Latch.
C141-E280
3-11
This page is intentionally left blank.
CHAPTER 4 Theory of Device Operation
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
Outline
Subassemblies
Circuit Configuration
Power-on Sequence
Self-calibration
Read/write Circuit
Servo Control
This chapter explains basic design concepts of the disk drive. Also, this chapter
explains subassemblies of the disk drive, each sequence, servo control, and
electrical circuit blocks.
C141-E280
4-1
Theory of Device Operation
4.1 Outline
This chapter consists of two parts. First part (Section 4.2) explains mechanical
assemblies of the disk drive. Second part (Sections 4.3 through 4.7) explains a
servo information recorded in the disk drive and drive control method.
4.2 Subassemblies
The disk drive consists of a disk enclosure (DE) and printed circuit assembly
(PCA).
The DE contains all movable parts in the disk drive, including the disk, spindle,
actuator, read/write head, and air filter. For details, see Subsections 4.2.1 to 4.2.4.
The PCA contains the control circuits for the disk drive. The disk drive has one
PCA. For details, see Sections 4.3.
4.2.1 Disk
The DE contains disks with an outer diameter of 65 mm and an inner diameter of
20 mm.
Servo data is recorded on each cylinder (total 162). Servo data written at factory
is read out by the read head. For servo data, see Section 4.7.
4.2.2 Spindle
The spindle consists of a disk stack assembly and spindle motor. The disk stack
assembly is activated by the direct drive sensor-less DC spindle motor, which has
a speed of 7,200 rpm ±1%. The spindle is controlled with detecting a PHASE
signal generated by counter electromotive voltage of the spindle motor at starting.
4.2.3 Actuator
The actuator consists of a voice coil motor (VCM) and a head carriage. The VCM
moves the head carriage along the inner or outer edge of the disk. The head
carriage position is controlled by feeding back the difference of the target position
that is detected and reproduced from the servo information read by the read/write
head.
4-2
C141-E280
4.3 Circuit Configuration
4.2.4 Air filter
There are two types of air filters: a breather filter and a circulation filter.
The breather filter makes an air in and out of the DE to prevent unnecessary
pressure around the spindle when the disk starts or stops rotating. When disk
drives are transported under conditions where the air pressure changes a lot,
filtered air is circulated in the DE.
The circulation filter cleans out dust and dirt from inside the DE. The disk drive
cycles air continuously through the circulation filter through an enclosed loop air
cycle system operated by a blower on the rotating disk.
4.3 Circuit Configuration
Figure 4.1 shows the power supply configuration of the disk drive, and Figure 4.2
shows the disk drive circuit configuration.
(1) Read/write circuit
The read/write circuit consists of two circuits; read/write preamplifier (PreAMP)
and read channel (RDC) which is integrated into LSI with MCU and HDC.
The PreAMP consists of the write current switch circuit, that flows the write
current to the head coil, and the voltage amplifier circuit, that amplitudes the read
output from the head.
The RDC is the read demodulation circuit using the Modified Extended Partial
Response (MEEPR), and contains the Viterbi detector, programmable filter,
adaptable transversal filter, times base generator, data separator circuits,
RLL (Run Length Limited) encoder and servo demodulation circuit.
(2) Servo circuit
The position and speed of the voice coil motor are controlled by closed-loop servo
using the servo information recorded on the data surface. The servo information is
an analog signal converted to digital for processing by a MPU and then
reconverted to an analog signal for control of the voice coil motor.
The MPU precisely sets each head on the track according on the servo information
on the media surface.
(3) Spindle motor driver circuit
The circuit measures the interval of a PHASE signal generated by counter-
electromotive voltage of a motor and controls the motor speed comparing target
speed.
C141-E280
4-3
Theory of Device Operation
(4) Controller circuit
Major functions are listed below.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Serial-ATA interface control and data transfer control
Data buffer management
Sector format control
Defect management
ECC control
Error recovery and self-diagnosis
5.0V
S-DRAM
3.3V
Generator
Circuit
SVC
-3V
1.2V
Generator
Circuit
PreAMP
Generator
Circuit
3.3V
-3.0V
Serial-FROM
MCU & HDC & RDC
Integration
1.2V
Figure 4.1 Power supply configuration
4-4
C141-E280
4.3 Circuit Configuration
Serial-ATA Interface
PCA
Data Buffer
SDRAM
MCU & HDC & RDC
MCU
HDC
Serial
Flash ROM
RDC
SVC
Shock
Sensor
Crystal
DE
SP Motor
Media
VCM
Thermistor
R/W Pre-Amp
HEAD
Figure 4.2 Circuit configuration
C141-E280
4-5
Theory of Device Operation
4.4 Power-on Sequence
Figure 4.3 describes the operation sequence of the disk drive at power-on. The
outline is described below.
a) After the power is turned on, the disk drive initializes its SATA interface
block.
b) The disk drive executes the MPU bus test, internal register read/write test, and
work RAM read/write test. When the self-diagnosis terminates successfully,
the disk drive starts the spindle motor.
c) The disk drive executes self-diagnosis (data buffer read/write test).
d) After confirming that the spindle motor has reached rated speed, the head
assembly is loaded on the disk.
e) The disk drive positions the heads onto the SA area and reads out the system
information.
f) The drive becomes ready. The host can issue commands.
g) The disk drive executes self -calibration. This collects data for VCM torque
and mechanical external forces applied to the actuator, and updates the
calibrating value.
4-6
C141-E280
4.4 Power-on Sequence
Power-on
Start
a)
SATA I/F Initialization
b)
Self-diagnosis 1
- MPU bus test
- Internal register
write/read test
- Work RAM write/read
test
The spindle motor starts.
Self-diagnosis 2
- Data buffer write/read
test
c)
e)
f)
Initial on-track and read
out of system information
Confirming spindle motor
speed
d)
Drive ready state
(command waiting state)
Load the head assembly
g)
Execute self-calibration
End
Figure 4.3 Power-on operation sequence
C141-E280
4-7
Theory of Device Operation
4.5 Self-calibration
The disk drive occasionally performs self-calibration in order to sense and
calibrate mechanical external forces on the actuator, and VCM torque. This
enables precise seek and read/write operations.
4.5.1 Self-calibration contents
(1) Sensing and compensating for external forces
The actuator suffers from torque due to the FPC forces and winds accompanying
disk revolution. The torque varies with the disk drive and the cylinder where the
head is positioned. To execute stable fast seek operations, external forces are
occasionally sensed.
The firmware of the drive measures and stores the force (value of the actuator
motor drive current) that balances the torque for stopping head stably. This
includes the current offset in the power amplifier circuit and DAC system.
The forces are compensated by adding the measured value to the specified current
value to the power amplifier. This makes the stable servo control.
To compensate torque varying by the cylinder, the disk is divided into 13 areas
from the innermost to the outermost circumference and the compensating value is
measured at the measuring cylinder on each area at factory calibration. The
measured values are stored in the SA cylinder. In the self-calibration, the
compensating value is updated using the value in the SA cylinder.
(2) Compensating open loop gain
Torque constant value of the VCM has dispersion for each drive, and varies
depending on the cylinder that the head is positioned. To realize the high speed
seek operation, the value that compensates torque constant value change and loop
gain change of the whole servo system due to temperature change is measured and
stored.
For sensing, the firmware mixes the disturbance signal to the position signal at the
state that the head is positioned to any cylinder. The firmware calculates the loop
gain from the position signal and stores the compensation value against to the
target gain as ratio.
For compensating, the direction current value to the power amplifier is multiplied
by the compensation value. By this compensation, loop gain becomes constant
value and the stable servo control is realized.
4-8
C141-E280
4.5 Self-calibration
To compensate torque constant value change depending on cylinder, whole
cylinders from most inner to most outer cylinder are divided into 13 partitions at
calibration in the factory, and the compensation data is measured for
representative cylinder of each partition. This measured value is stored in the SA
area. The compensation value at self-calibration is calculated using the value in
the SA area.
4.5.2 Execution timing of self-calibration
Self-calibration is performed once when power is turned on. After that, the disk
drive does not perform self-calibration until it detects an error.
That is, self-calibration is performed each time one of the following events occur:
•
In the case that the disk drive starts up normally, the first part of self-
calibration starts after a lapse of 100 msec. The execution of first part is
about 150 msec length. The remains is executed thereafter the transfer to
Active-Idle state which takes about 200 msec.
The latter is interrupted when the disk drive receives a Host command, and it
resumes after next transfer to Active-Idle state.
•
•
The number of retries to write or seek data reaches the specified value.
The error rate of data reading, writing, or seeking becomes lower than the
specified value.
4.5.3 Command processing during self-calibration
This enables the host to execute the command without waiting for a long time,
even when the disk drive is performing self-calibration. The command execution
wait time is about maximum 72 ms.
When the error rate of data reading, writing, or seeking becomes lower than the
specified value, self-calibration is performed to maintain disk drive stability.
If the disk drive receives a command execution request from the host while
performing self-calibration, it stops the self-calibration and starts to execute the
command. In other words, if a disk read or write service is necessary, the disk
drive positions the head to the track requested by the host, reads or writes data,
and then restarts calibration after about 3 seconds.
If the error rate recovers to a value exceeding the specified value, self-calibration
is not performed.
C141-E280
4-9
Theory of Device Operation
4.6 Read/write Circuit
The read/write circuit consists of the read/write preamplifier (PreAMP), the write
circuit, the read circuit, and the time base generator in the read channel (RDC)
block which is integrated into LSI. Figure 4.4 is a block diagram of the read/write
circuit.
4.6.1 Read/write preamplifier (PreAMP)
PreAMP equips a read preamplifier and a write current switch, that sets the bias
current to the MR device and the current in writing. Each channel is connected to
each data head, and PreAMP switches channel by serial I/O. In the event of any
abnormalities, including a head short-circuit or head open circuit, the write unsafe
signal is generated so that abnormal write does not occur.
4.6.2 Write circuit
The write data is transferred from the hard disk controller (HDC) to the RDC in
LSI. The write data is sent to the PreAMP as differential signal from LSI, and the
data is written onto the media.
(1) Write precompensation
Write precompensation compensates, during a write process, for write non-
linearity generated at reading.
Figure 4.4 Read/write circuit block diagram
4-10
C141-E280
4.6 Read/write Circuit
4.6.3 Read circuit
The head read signal from the PreAMP is regulated by the automatic gain control
(AGC) circuit. Then the output is converted into the sampled read data pulse by
the programmable filter circuit and the flash digitizer circuit. This signal is
converted into the read data by the decoder circuit based on the read data
maximum-likelihood-detected by the Viterbi detection circuit.
(1) AGC circuit
The AGC circuit automatically regulates the output amplitude to a constant value
even when the input amplitude level fluctuates. The AGC amplifier output is
maintained at a constant level even when the head output fluctuates due to the
head characteristics or outer/inner head positions.
(2) Programmable filter circuit
The programmable filter circuit has a low-pass filter function that eliminates
unnecessary high frequency noise component and a high frequency boost-up
function that equalizes the waveform of the read signal.
Cut-off frequency of the low-pass filter and boost-up gain are controlled from the
register in read channel block. The MPU optimizes the cut-off frequency and
boost-up gain according to the transfer frequency of each zone.
(3) FIR circuit
This circuit is 10-tap sampled analog transversal filter circuit that equalizes the
head read signal to the Modified Extended Partial Response (MEEPR) waveform.
(4) A/D converter circuit
This circuit changes Sampled Read Data Pulse from the FIR circuit into Digital
Read Data.
(5) Viterbi detection circuit
The sample hold waveform output from the flash digitizer circuit is sent to the
Viterbi detection circuit. The Viterbi detection circuit demodulates data according
to the survivor path sequence.
4.6.4 Digital PLL circuit
The drive uses constant density recording to increase total capacity. This is
different from the conventional method of recording data with a fixed data transfer
rate at all data area. In the constant density recording method, data area is divided
into zones by radius and the data transfer rate is set so that the recording density of
the inner cylinder of each zone is nearly constant. The drive divides data area into
30 zones to set the data transfer rate.
The MPU set the data transfer rate setup data (SD/SC) to the RDC block that
includes the Digital PLL circuit to change the data transfer rate.
C141-E280
4-11
Theory of Device Operation
4.7 Servo Control
The actuator motor and the spindle motor are submitted to servo control. The
actuator motor is controlled for moving and positioning the head to the track
containing the desired data. To turn the disk at a constant velocity, the actuator
motor is controlled according to the servo data that is written on the data side
beforehand.
4.7.1 Servo control circuit
Figure 4.5 is the block diagram of the servo control circuit. The following
describes the functions of the blocks:
(1)
MPU/HDC/RDC
SVC
(3)
(4)
Power
(2)
Servo
burst
capture
MPU
core
DAC
Head
VCM current
Amp
CSR
(7)
Position Sense
VCM
(5)
(6)
Driver
Spindle
motor
control
Spindle
motor
CSR: Current Sense Resister
VCM: Voice Coil Motor
Figure 4.5 Block diagram of servo control circuit
4-12
C141-E280
4.7 Servo Control
(1) Microprocessor unit (MPU)
The MPU executes startup of the spindle motor, movement to the reference
cylinder, seek to the specified cylinder, and calibration operations.
The main internal operations of the MPU are shown below.
a. Spindle motor start
Starts the spindle motor and accelerates it to normal speed when power is
applied.
b. Move head to reference cylinder
Drives the VCM to position the head at the any cylinder in the data area. The
logical initial cylinder is at the outermost circumference (cylinder 0).
c. Seek to specified cylinder
Drives the VCM to position the head to the specified cylinder.
d. Calibration
Senses and stores the thermal offset between heads and the mechanical forces
on the actuator, and stores the calibration value.
(2) Servo burst capture circuit
The servo burst capture circuit reproduces signals (position signals) that indicate
the head position from the servo data on the data surface. From the servo area on
the data area surface, via the data head, the burst signals of EVEN1, ODD,
EVEN2 are output as shown in Figure 4.7 in subsequent to the servo mark, gray
code that indicates the cylinder position, and index information. The servo signals
do A/D-convert by Fourier-demodulator in the servo burst capture circuit. At that
time the AGC circuit is in hold mode. The A/D converted data is recognized by
the MPU as position information.
(3) D/A converter (DAC)
The control program calculates the specified data value (digital value) of the VCM
drive current, and the value is converted from digital-to-analog so that an analog
output voltage is sent to the power amplifier.
(4) Power amplifier
The power amplifier feeds currents, corresponding to the DAC output signal
voltage to the VCM.
(5) Spindle motor control circuit
The spindle motor control circuit controls the sensor-less spindle motor. A spindle
driver IC with a built-in PLL circuit that is on a hardware unit controls the sensor-
less spindle motor.
C141-E280
4-13
Theory of Device Operation
(6) Driver circuit
The driver circuit is a power amplitude circuit that receives signals from the
spindle motor control circuit and feeds currents to the spindle motor.
(7) VCM current sense resistor (CSR)
This resistor controls current at the power amplifier by converting the VCM
current into voltage and feeding back.
4.7.2 Data-surface servo format
Figure 4.6 describes the physical layout of the servo frame. The three areas
indicated by (1) to (3) in Figure 4.6 are described below.
(1) Inner guard band
This area is located inside the user area, and the rotational speed of the VCM can
be controlled on this cylinder area for head moving.
(2) Data area
This area is used as the user data area and SA area.
(3) Outer guard band
This area is located at outer position of the user data area, and the rotational speed
of the spindle can be controlled on this cylinder area for head moving.
4-14
C141-E280
4.7 Servo Control
Servo frame
(162 servo frames per revolution)
Diameter
direction
CYLn
CYLn – 1 (n: even number)
CYLn + 1
W/R Recovery
Servo Mark
Gray Code
W/R Recovery
Servo Mark
Gray Code
W/R Recovery
Servo Mark
Gray Code
EVEN1
ODD
Circumference
Direction
EVEN2
Post code
PAD
Erase:DC erase
area
Figure 4.6 Physical sector servo configuration on disk surface
C141-E280
4-15
Theory of Device Operation
4.7.3 Servo frame format
As the servo information, the IDD uses the phase signal servo generated from the
gray code and servo EVEN and ODD. This servo information is used for
positioning operation of radius direction and position detection of circumstance
direction.
Basically, the servo frame consists of 6 blocks; write/read recovery, servo mark,
gray code, Burst EVEN1, Burst ODD, Burst EVEN2, Post code, and PAD. Figure
4.7 shows the servo frame format.
Write/read
recovery
Servo Gray code
mark
Burst
EVEN1
Burst
ODD
Burst
EVEN2
Post
code
PAD
Figure 4.7 Servo frame format
(1) Write/read recovery
This area is used to absorb the write/read transient and to stabilize the AGC.
(2) Servo mark
This area generates timing for demodulating the gray code and position-
demodulating the burst signal by detecting the servo mark.
(3) Gray code (including sector address bits)
This area is used as cylinder address. The data in this area is converted into the
binary data by the gray code demodulation circuit.
(4) Burst Even1, Burst Odd, Burst Even2
These areas are used as position signals between tracks and the IDD control so that
target phase signal is generated from Burst Even and Burst Odd.
(5) Post code
(6) PAD
This area is used for the precise correction of the servo information which is
recorded on the media.
This area is used as a gap between servo and data.
4-16
C141-E280
4.7 Servo Control
4.7.4 Actuator motor control
The voice coil motor (VCM) is controlled by feeding back the servo data recorded
on the data surface. The MPU fetches the position sense data on the servo frame
at a constant interval of sampling time, executes calculation, and updates the VCM
drive current.
The servo control of the actuator includes the operation to move the head to the
reference cylinder, the seek operation to move the head to the target cylinder to
read or write data, and the track-following operation to position the head onto the
target track.
(1) Operation to move the head to the reference cylinder
The MPU moves the head to the reference cylinder when the power is turned. The
reference cylinder is in the data area.
When power is applied the heads are moved from the outside of media to the
normal servo data zone in the following sequence:
a) Micro current is fed to the VCM to press the head against the outer direction.
b) The head is loaded on the disk.
c) When the servo mark is detected the head is moved slowly toward the inner
circumference at a constant speed.
d) If the head is stopped at the reference cylinder from there. Track following
control starts.
(2) Seek operation
Upon a data read/write request from the host, the MPU confirms the necessity of
access to the disk. If a read/write instruction is issued, the MPU seeks the desired
track.
The MPU feeds the VCM current via the D/A converter and power amplifier to
move the head. The MPU calculates the difference (speed error) between the
specified target position and the current position for each sampling timing during
head moving. The MPU then feeds the VCM drive current by setting the
calculated result into the D/A converter. The calculation is digitally executed by
the firmware. When the head arrives at the target cylinder, the track is followed.
(3) Track following operation
Except during head movement to the reference cylinder and seek operation under
the spindle rotates in steady speed, the MPU does track following control. To
position the head at the center of a track, the DSP drives the VCM by feeding
micro current. For each sampling time, the VCM drive current is determined by
filtering the position difference between the target position and the position
clarified by the detected position sense data. The filtering includes servo
compensation. These are digitally controlled by the firmware.
C141-E280
4-17
Theory of Device Operation
4.7.5 Spindle motor control
Hall-less three-phase twelve-pole motor is used for the spindle motor, and the
PWM type current control circuit is used as the spindle motor driver (called SVC
hereafter). The firmware operates on the MPU manufactured by Fujitsu. The
spindle motor is controlled by sending several signals including the serial data
from the MPU to the SVC. There are three modes for the spindle control; start
mode, acceleration mode, and stable rotation mode.
(1) Start mode
When power is supplied, the spindle motor is started in the following sequence:
a) After the power is turned on, the MPU sends the serial data to the SVC to
charge the charge pump capacitor of the SVC.
b) When the charge pump capacitor is charged enough, the MPU sets the SVC to
the motor start mode.
It moves to 3) or 5) step depending on the condition of spindle motor. It is
treaded as the stop condition, it moves to the step 3). Whereas, it is treated as
the free-wheeling condition, it moves to the step 5).
c) The phase of the current flowed in the motor is changed in the order of (V-
phase to U-phase), (W-phase to U-phase), (W-phase to V-phase), (U-phase to
V-phase), (U-phase to W-phase), and (V-phase to W-phase) (after that,
repeating this order).
The above operations mean the generation of rotational magnetic field.
d) During phase switching, the spindle motor starts rotating in low speed, and
generates a back electromotive force. The SVC detects this back
electromotive force and reports to the MPU using a PHASE signal for speed
detection.
e) The MPU is waiting for a PHASE signal. When no phase signal is sent for a
specific period, the MPU resets the SVC and starts from the beginning. When
a PHASE signal is sent, the SVC enters the acceleration mode.
(2) Acceleration mode
In this mode, the MPU stops the phase switching to the SVC. The SVC starts a
phase switching by itself based on the back electromotive force. Then, rotation of
the spindle motor accelerates. The MPU calculates a rotational speed of the
spindle motor based on the PHASE signal from the SVC, and waits till the
rotational speed reaches 7,200 rpm. When the rotational speed reaches 7,200 rpm,
the SVC enters the stable rotation mode.
(3) Stable rotation mode
The SVC builds the PLL circuit into, and to become the rotational speed of the
target, controls a stable rotation with hardware.
The firmware calculates time of one rotation from PHASE signal. PHASE signal
is outputted from the SVC. And the firmware observes an abnormal rotation.
4-18
C141-E280
CHAPTER 5 Interface
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
Physical Interface
Logical Interface
Host Commands
Command Protocol
Power-on and COMRESET
This chapter gives details about the interface, and the interface commands and
timings.
C141-E280
5-1
Interface
5.1 Physical Interface
5.1.1 Interface signals
Figure 5.1 shows the interface signals.
TX data
RX data
TX+
TX+
TX data
TX−
TX−
RX+
RX data
RX+
Device
analog
front
Host
analog
front
end
RX−
RX−
end
ComWake
ComWake
ComInit
ComReset
+5VDC
GND
Figure 5.1 Interface signals
An explanation of each signal is provided below.
TX + / TX -
These signals are the outbound high speed differential signals that are
connected to the serial ATA cable.
RX + / RX -
These signals are the inbound high speed differential signals that are connected
to the serial ATA cable.
TxData
Serially encoded 10b data attached to the high speed serial differential line
driver
5-2
C141-E280
5.1 Physical Interface
RxData
Serially encoded 10b data attached to the high speed serial differential line
receiver
COMWAKE
Signal from the out of band detector that indicates the COMWAKE out of
band signal is being detected.
COMRESET / COMINIT
Host:
Signal from the out of band detector that indicates the COMINIT out
of band signal is being detected.
Device: Signal from the out of band detector that indicates the COMRESET
out of band signal is being detected.
5VDC/GND
5VDC: +5 V power supply to the disk drive
GND: Ground for each signal and +5 V power supply
C141-E280
5-3
Interface
5.1.2 Signal interface regulation
5.1.2.1 Out of band signaling
During OOB signaling transmissions, the differential and common mode levels of
the signal lines shall comply with the same electrical specifications as for in-band
data transmission, specified as follows.
COMRESET/COMINIT
106.7 ns
320 ns
COMWAKE
106.7 ns
106.7 ns
5-4
C141-E280
5.1 Physical Interface
5.1.2.2 Primitives descriptions
The following table contains the primitive mnemonics and a brief description of
each.
Primitive
ALIGN
Name
Description
Physical layer control
Upon receipt of an ALIGN, the physical layer
readjusts internal operations as necessary to
perform its functions correctly.
CONT
Continue repeating
previous primitive
The CONT primitive allows long strings of
repeated primitives to be eliminated. The
CONT primitive implies that the previously
received primitive be repeated as long as
another primitive is not received.
EOF
End of frame
EOF marks the end of a frame.
PMACK
Power management
acknowledge
Sent in response to a PMREQ_S or
PMREQ_P when a receiving node is prepared
to enter a power mode state.
HOLD
Hold data transmission
HOLD is transmitted in place of payload data
within a frame when the transmitter does not
have the next payload data ready for
transmission. HOLD is also transmitted on the
backchannel when a receiver is not ready to
receive additional payload data.
HOLDA
PMNAK
Hold acknowledge
This primitive is sent by a transmitter as long
the HOLD primitive is received by its
companion receiver.
Power management
denial
Sent in response to a PMREQ_S or
PMREQ_P when a receiving node is not
prepared to enter a power mode state or when
power management is not supported.
PMREQ_P
Power management
request to partial
This primitive is sent continuously until
PMACK or PMNAK is received. When
PMACK is received, current node (host or
device) will stop PMREQ_P and enters the
Partial power management state.
PMREQ_S
R_ERR
Power management
request to slumber
This primitive is sent continuously until
PMACK or PMNAK is received. When
PMACK is received, current node (host or
device) will stop PMREQ_S and enters the
Slumber power management state.
Reception error
Current node (host or device) detected error in
received payload.
C141-E280
5-5
Interface
Primitive
Name
Description
R_IP
Reception in progress
Current node (host or device) is receiving
payload.
R_OK
R_RDY
SOF
Reception with no error
Receiver ready
Current node (host or device) detected no
error in received payload.
Current node (host or device) is ready to
receive payload.
Start of frame
Start of a frame. Payload and CRC follow to
EOF.
SYNC
Synchronization
Synchronizing primitive - always idle.
WTRM
Wait for frame
termination
After transmission of any of the EOF, the
transmitter will transmit WTRM while waiting
for reception status from receiver.
X_RDY
Transmission data ready
Current node (host or device) has payload
ready for transmission.
5.1.3 Electrical specifications
For the electrical requirements of physical layer, refer to "Electrical specifications"
section in the "Serial-ATA Revision 2.6."
5-6
C141-E280
5.1 Physical Interface
5.1.4 Connector pinouts
The pin definitions are shown in Table 5.1.
Table 5.1 Connector pinouts
Signal segment key
S1
S2
Gnd
A+
2nd mate
Differential signal pair A from Phy
Connected to TXD at the host side.
Connected to RXD at the device side.
S3
A-
S4
S5
Gnd
B-
2nd mate
Differential signal pair B from Phy
Connected to RXD at the host side.
Connected to TXD at the device side.
S6
S7
B+
Gnd
2nd mate
"Key and spacing separate signal and power segments"
N.C.(Open)
P1
P2
V33
V33
V33
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
V5
N.C.(Open)
N.C.(Open)
P3
P4
1st mate
P5
2nd mate
P6
2nd mate
P7
5 V power, pre-charge, 2nd mate
5 V power
P8
V5
P9
V5
5 V power
P10
P11
Gnd
2nd mate
Staggered
Spin-up
Mode/
Activity
LED
• Staggered Spin-up mode detect for input
• Activity LED drive for output
For the specification of P11, see Section 5.1.5.
(in next page)
When the host system does not use these
functions, the corresponding pin to be mated
with P11 in the power cable receptacle
connector shall be grounded.
P12
Gnd
V12
V12
V12
1st mate
N.C.(Open)
N.C.(Open)
N.C.(Open)
P13
P14
P15
Power segment key
Notes:
Note) Since applying a single external supply voltage of 5 V enables this
drive to operate it is unnecessary to supply +3.3 V and +12 V
power supplies.
C141-E280
5-7
Interface
5.1.5 P11 function
The disk drive supports the following functions when P11 pin in the power supply
segment of interface connector is used as an input or output pin.
P11 pin supports the functions as follows:
•
•
Staggered Spin-up:
Use P11 as an input pin
Use P11 as an output pin
Driving Activity LED:
The following is P11 setting and hardware requirement for these functions.
5.1.5.1 Staggered Spin-up
It is able to set whether the disk drive spins up at power on or not, by input voltage
level of 11th pin at the power supply segment on the interface connector.
a) P11 → Open (no connection):
Staggered Mode Enable.
The disk drive does not spin up until after
successful Phy initialization at power on.
(Default setting)
b) P11 → Grounded (0.8 V or less): Staggered Mode Disable.
The disk drive spins up at power on.
c) P11 → "High" level (The P11 line in the host system is pulled up by
resistor [recommended value: 1 to 5.1 kΩ] to power supply in the
host system [Recommended voltage: 2V (3.3V or less)]:
Staggered Mode Enable
The drive does not spin up until after
successful Phy initialization at power on.
5.1.5.2 Driving Activity LED
It is possible that the disk drive is able to drive P11 pin as output for indication of
Activity LED.
a) P11 output level → "Low": It indicates that the command is in execution.
(LED is on)
b) P11 output level → "High": It indicates that the command is not
in execution. (LED is off)
It is necessary to meet the requirements for P11 as output pin in case of driving
Activity LED.
5-8
C141-E280
5.1 Physical Interface
Table 5.2 Requirements for P11 as an output pin
Asserted
Deasserted
≤ 0.7V
≥ 0.7V
VACT
IACT
-
+50uA
Figure 5.2 Example of the circuit for driving Activity LED
C141-E280
5-9
Interface
5.1.6 Hot Plug
The disk drive is "Hot Plug Capable" which is based on Serial ATA Revision 2.6.
It is recommended to use the pre-charge resistor for protection from over current
at +5V power supply circuit in the host system when the disk drive is hot-plugged.
(Refer to the Serial ATA Revision 2.6.)
The equivalent circuit of +5V power supply at Hot Plugging is in the following
figure.
It is necessary to choose pre-charge resistor RL value, which is in permissible
range of +5V power supply specification at the host system.
Refer to the equivalent circuit when the optimized value of pre-charge resistor RL.
It is recommended to choose the minimum value which is in permissible range of
+5V power supply specification at the host system. Because it is possible that
rush current occurs again when P8, P9 pin connection after P7 (+5V pre-charge
pin) connection dependent on the insertion speed.
5-10
C141-E280
5.2 Logical Interface
5.2 Logical Interface
The host system and the device communicate with each other by sending and
receiving serial data.
The host and the device have several dedicated communication layers between
them. These layers have different functions, enabling communication between the
different levels of layers within the host or device and between layers at the same
level that link the host and device.
Figure 5.3 is a conceptual diagram of the communication layers.
Application
layer 4
Device:
Host:
Software control
Buffer memory
DMA engine(s)
Software control
Buffer Memory
DMA engine(s)
Transport
layer 3
Shadow Block Register
Block Register
Transport Layer
Transport Layer
Link
layer 2
Link Layer
Link Layer
Physical
layer 1
Physical Layer
Physical Layer
Host located layers
Device located layers
Figure 5.3 Conceptual diagram of communication layers
C141-E280
5-11
Interface
5.2.1 Communication layers
Each of the layers is outlined below.
Physical layer
•
•
Detects, sends, and receives band signals.
Sends serial data to and receives it from the link layer.
Link layer
•
Negotiates against mutual transfer requests between the host system and
device.
•
•
Encodes serial data as 10- or 8-bit data, then converts it into DWORD data.
Inserts auxiliary signals (SOF, CRC, and EOF), deletes auxiliary signals, and
communicates with the transport and physical layers.
Transport layer
•
Exchanges data in communication with the link layer, and builds the frame
information structure (FIS).
•
•
Contains a (Shadow) Block Register.
Reflects the FIS contents to the Block Register.
5-12
C141-E280
5.2 Logical Interface
5.2.2 Outline of the Shadow Block Register
Each transport layer in the host system and device has a block register, which is
called a Shadow Block Register in the host system, and a Block Register in the
device.
These registers are used when the host system issues a command to the device.
Table 5.3 Shadow Block Register
Command Block registers
Read
Error
Write
Data Port
Features
Sector Count (exp)
Sector Count
Sector Count (exp)
Sector Count
Sector Number
Cylinder Low
Cylinder High
Sector Number (exp)
Cylinder Low (exp)
Cylinder High (exp)
Sector Number
Cylinder Low
Cylinder High
Sector Number (exp)
Cylinder Low (exp)
Cylinder High (exp)
Device / Head
Status
Command
Control Block registers
Alternate Status
Device Control
Note: Each of the Sector Count, Sector Number, Cylinder Low, and Cylinder
High fields has a higher-order field used for issuing the Ext command.
The fields are called Sector Count exp, Sector Number exp, Cylinder
Low exp, and Cylinder High exp, respectively. For information on
writing data to these fields, see "Device Control Field."
C141-E280
5-13
Interface
5.2.3 Outline of the frame information structure (FIS)
The transport layer converts data written in a Block Register into the FIS, and
sends it to the upper layer.
The FIS, which is generated in the transport layer, is explained below.
5.2.3.1 FIS types
The types of FIS are as follows (Each FIS is referred to as abbreviation in square
brackets in this manual.):
•
•
•
•
Register- Host to Device [RegHD]
Register- Device to Host [RegDH]
DMA Active – Device to Host [DMA Active]
DMA Setup – Device to Host or Host to Device (Bidirectional)
[DMA Setup]
•
•
•
•
Set Device Bits – Device to Host [SetDB]
BIST Active – Bidirectional [BIST Active]
PIO Setup – Device to Host [PIO Setup]
Data – Host to Device or Device to Host (Bidirectional) [DATA]
5-14
C141-E280
5.2 Logical Interface
5.2.3.2 Register - Host to Device
The Register - Host to Device FIS has the following layout:
3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Features
Command
C R R Reserved (0)
FIS Type (27h)
0
1
2
3
4
Device
LBA High
LBA Mid
LBA Low
Features (exp)
Control
LBA High (exp)
Reserved (0)
Reserved (0)
LBA Mid (exp)
Sector Count (exp)
Reserved (0)
LBA Low (exp)
Sector Count
Reserved (0)
Reserved (0)
Figure 5.4 Register - Host to Device FIS layout
The host system uses the Register - Host to Device FIS when information in the
Register Block is transferred from the host system to the device. This is the
mechanism for issuing the ATA command from the host system to the device.
C - To update the Command field, "1" would be set in this field; and to update the
Device Control field, "0" would be set in the field.
If both C = 1 and SRST = 1 are set, operation is not guaranteed.
C141-E280
5-15
Interface
5.2.3.3 Register - Device to Host
The Register - Device to Host FIS has the following layout:
3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Error
Status
R I R Reserved (0)
FIS Type (34h)
0
1
2
3
4
Device
LBA High
LBA Mid
LBA Low
Reserved (0)
Reserved (0)
Reserved (0)
LBA High (exp)
Reserved (0)
Reserved (0)
LBA Mid (exp)
Sector Count (exp)
Reserved (0)
LBA Low (exp) (0)
Sector Count
Reserved (0)
Figure 5.5 Register - Device to Host FIS layout
The Register - Device to Host FIS is used when information concerning the Shadow
Register Block in the host adapter is updated. This FIS indicates that the device has
completed a command operation. Furthermore, this is a mechanism for changing
information concerning the Shadow Register Block of the host adapter.
I - If this bit is set, an interrupt request is issued to the host system.
5.2.3.4 DMA Active - Device to Host
The DMA Active - Device to Host FIS has the following layout:
3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved (0)
Reserved (0)
R R R Reserved (0)
FIS Type (39h)
0
Figure 5.6 DMA Active - Device to Host FIS layout
The host uses the DMA Active - Device to Host FIS layout. This FIS instructs the
host to continue transferring DMA data from the host to the device.
5-16
C141-E280
5.2 Logical Interface
5.2.3.5 DMA Setup - Device to Host or Host to Device (Bidirectional)
The DMA Setup - Device to Host or Host to Device FIS has the following layout:
3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved (0)
Reserved (0)
A I D Reserved (0)
FIS Type (41h)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
TAG
0
Reserved (0)
DMA Buffer Offset
DMA Transfer Count
Reserved (0)
Figure 5.7 DMA Setup - Device to Host or Host to Device FIS layout
The DMA Setup - Device to Host or Host to Device FIS communicates the start of
a first-party DMA access to the host system. This FIS is used to request the host
system or device to set up the DMA controller before the start of a DMA data
transfer.
A - Auto Active bit. If this bit is cleared ("0" is set for the bit), it indicates that a
DMA Active FIS transfer is required before a Data FIS transfer.
D - Direction bit. If this bit is set ("1" is set for the bit), it indicates that the data
transfer direction is from the device to the host system.
C141-E280
5-17
Interface
5.2.3.6 BIST Active - Bidirectional
The BIST Active - Bidirectional FIS has the following layout:
3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved (0)
Data [31:24]
Data [31:24]
Pattern definition
T A S L F P R V
Data [23:16]
R R R Reserved (0)
FIS Type (58h)
0
1
2
Data [23:16]
Data [7:0]
Data [23:16]
Data [23:16]
Data [7:0]
Figure 5.8 BIST Active - Bidirectional FIS layout
The BIST Active - Bidirectional FIS is used to set the receiver to Loop Back
mode. This FIS can be sent by either the host system or device.
The following combinations of pattern definitions are supported:
Table 5.4 BIST combinations
SC
Reg
T
A
S
L
F
P
V
Contents
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
1
-
-
-
-
1
-
09h SATA Phy Analog Loopback Mode
10h Far End Retimed Loopback Mode
C0h No ALIGN Transmit_only Mode (Scramble ON)
(*1)
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
E0h No ALIGN Transmit_only Mode (Scramble OFF)
C4h No ALIGN Transmit_only with primitive Mode
(Scramble ON) (*1)
1
E4h No ALIGN Transmit_only with primitive Mode
(Scramble OFF)
1
1
1
-
-
1
-
1
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
80h ALIGN Transmit_only Mode (Scramble ON) (*1)
A0h ALIGN Transmit_only Mode (Scramble OFF)
1
84h ALIGN Transmit_only with primitive Mode
(Scramble ON) (*1)
1
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
1
-
-
A4h ALIGN Transmit_only with primitive Mode
(Scramble OFF)
1
5-18
C141-E280
5.2 Logical Interface
5.2.3.7 Data - Host to Device or Device to Host (Bidirectional)
This Data FIS has the following layout:
3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved (0)
Reserved (0)
R R R Reserved (0)
FIS Type (46h)
0
...
...
n
N Dwords of data
(1 to 2048 Dwords)
Figure 5.9 Data FIS (Bidirectional) layout
The Data FIS is used for data transfers between the host system and device.
5.2.3.8 PIO Setup - Device to Host
Error
Status
R I D Reserved (0)
Cyl Low
FIS Type (5Fh)
Sector Number
0
1
2
3
4
Dev / Head
Reserved (0)
E_Status
Cyl High
Cyl High (exp)
Reserved (0)
Cyl Low (exp)
Sector Num (exp) (0)
Sector Count
Sector Count (exp)
Reserved (0)
Transfer Count
Figure 5.10 PIO Setup - Device to Host FIS layout
The PIO Setup FIS is a device to host FIS, FIS Type 5Fh. The PIO Setup FIS is
used by the device to provide the host adapter with the data transfer count and
DRQ block status during the PIO data phase. This information allows the host
adapter to control PIO data transfers. There are two command structure Response
mappings into a Response FIS in the serial transport.
a) 48-bit command structure PIO Setup mapping
b) 28-bit command structure PIO Setup mapping
C141-E280
5-19
Interface
FIS Type -
Cyl Low -
Set to a value of 5Fh. Defines the rest of the FIS fields.
Defines the length of the FIS as five Dwords.
Holds the contents of the cylinder low register of the
Command Block.
Cyl Low (exp) -
Cyl High -
Cyl High (exp) -
D -
Contains the contents of the expanded address field of the
Shadow Register Block.
Holds the contents of the cylinder high register of the
Command Block.
Contains the contents of the expanded address field of the
Shadow Register Block.
Indicates whether host memory is being written or read by
the device.
1 = write (device to host), 0 = read (host to device).
Dev / Head -
Holds the contents of the device / head register of the
Command Block.
Dev / Head (exp) - Contains the contents of the expanded address field of the
Shadow Register Block.
E_Status -
Contains the new value of the status register of the task file
block for correct synchronization of data transfers to host.
Error -
Contains the new value of the Error register of the Command
Block at the conclusion of all subsequent Data to Device
frames.
I -
Interrupt bit. This bit reflects the interrupt bit line of the device.
Reserved (0)
R -
Sector Count -
Holds the contents of the sector count register of the
Command Block.
Sector Count (exp) - Contains the contents of the expanded address field of the
Shadow Register Block.
Sector Number -
Holds the contents of the sector number register of the
Command Block.
Sector Num (exp) - Contains the contents of the expanded address field of the
Shadow Register Block.
Status -
Contains the new value of the status register of the Command
Block at the conclusion of all subsequent PIO Data to Device
frames.
Transfer Count -
Holds the number of bytes to be transferred in the subsequent
data FIS.
5-20
C141-E280
5.2 Logical Interface
5.2.3.9 Set Device Bits - Device to Host
Error
R Status Hi R Status Lo R
I
R
Reserved (0)
FIS Type (A1h)
0
1
SActive 31:0
Figure 5.11 Set Device Bits FIS
The Set Device Bits -
Device to Host FIS is used by the device to load Shadow Command
Block bits for which the device has exclusive write access. These
bits are the eight bits of the Error register and six of the eight bits of
the Status register. This FIS does not alter bit 7, BSY, or bit 3, DRQ,
of the Shadow Status register.
FIS Type -
Set to a value of A1h. Defines the rest of the FIS fields. Defines the
length of the FIS as two Dwords.
I -
Interrupt Bit. This bit signals the host adapter to enter an interrupt
pending state if both the BSY bit and the DRQ bit in the shadow
Status register are zero when the frame is received.
Error -
Contains the new value of the Error register of the Shadow Register
Block.
Status-Hi -
Contains the new value of bits 6, 5, and 4 of the Status register of
the Shadow Register Block.
Status-Lo - Contains the new value of bits 2,1, and 0 of the Status register of
the Shadow Register Block.
SActive -
The SActive field of the Set Device Bits FIS communicates
successful completion notification for each of up to 32 queued
commands. The field is bit-significant and the device sets bit
positions to one for each command tag it is indicating successful
completion notification for. The device may set more than one bit
to one if it is explicitly aggregating successful status returns. The
device shall only indicate completion notification for a command if
it has completed successfully.
C141-E280
5-21
Interface
5.2.4 Shadow block registers
(1) Error Field
The Error Field indicates the status of the command executed by the device.
The fields are valid when the ERR bit of the Status field is 1.
This register contains a diagnostic code after power is turned on, the COMRESET
or the EXECUTIVE DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC command is executed.
•
[Status at the completion of command execution other than diagnostic command]
Bit 7
X
Bit 6
UNC
Bit 5
X
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
IDNF/ SFRW
SFRR
ABRT TK0NF AMNF
X: Unused
- Bit 7: Unused
- Bit 6: Uncorrectable Data Error (UNC). This bit indicates that an
uncorrectable data error has been encountered.
- Bit 5: Unused
- Bit 4: ID Not Found (IDNF). This bit indicates an error except for bad sector,
uncorrectable error and SB not found.
Or, SATA Frame Error Write (SFRW) This bit indicates that a SATA
communication error has been encountered during the write process.
In this case, bit4 and bit2 are set both.
- Bit 3: SATA Frame Error Read (SF RR). This bit indicates that a SATA
communication error has been encountered during the read process.
In this case, bit3 and bit2 are set both.
- Bit 2: Aborted Command (ABRT). This bit indicates that the requested
command was aborted due to a device status error (e.g. Not Ready,
Write Fault) or the command code was invalid.
- Bit 1: Track 0 Not Found (TK0NF). This bit indicates that track 0 was not
found during RECALIBRATE command execution.
- Bit 0: Address Mark Not Found (AMNF). This bit indicates that the SB Not
Found error occurred.
[Diagnostic code]
- X '00': Format Unit is not completed.
- X '01': No Error Detected.
- X '02': HDC Diagnostic Error
- X '03': Data Buffer Diagnostic Error
- X '04': Memory Diagnostic Error
- X '05': Reading the system area is abnormal.
- X '06': Calibration is abnormal.
5-22
C141-E280
5.2 Logical Interface
(2) Features Field (exp)
The Features Field provides specific feature to a command. For instance, it is used
with SET FEATURES command to enable or disable caching.
(3) Sector Count Field (exp)
The Sector Count Field indicates the number of sectors of data to be transferred in
a read or write operation between the host system and the device. When the value
in this field is X '00', the sector count is 256. With the EXT system command, the
sector count is 65536 when value of the Sector Count Field is X '00' and that of
the Sector Count Field (exp) is X '00'.
When this field indicates 0 at the completion of the command execution, this
indicates that the command is completed successfully. If the command is not
completed successfully, this field indicates the number of sectors to be transferred
to complete the request from the host system. That is, this field indicates the
number of remaining sectors that the data has not been transferred due to the error.
However, as of the last sector of PIO transfer, SC=1 indicates the normal
completion.
The contents of this field also have other definitions (Refer to 5.4)
(4) Sector Number Field (exp)
The contents of this field indicate the starting sector number for the subsequent
command. The sector number should be between X '01' and [the number of
sectors per track defined by INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS command.
Under the LBA mode, this field indicates LBA bits 7 to 0. Under the LBA mode
of the EXT system command, LBA bits 31 to 24 are set in the Sector Number
Field, and LBA bits 7 to 0 are set in the Sector Number Field (exp).
(5) Cylinder Low Field (exp)
The contents of this field indicate low-order 8 bits of the starting cylinder address
for any disk-access.
At the end of a command, the contents of this field are updated to the current
cylinder number.
Under the LBA mode, this field indicates LBA bits 15 to 8. Under the LBA mode
of the EXT system command, LBA bits 39 to 32 are set in the Cylinder Low Field,
and LBA bits 15 to 8 are set in the Cylinder Low Field (exp).
C141-E280
5-23
Interface
(6) Cylinder High Field (exp)
The contents of this field indicate high-order 8 bits of the disk-access start cylinder
address.
At the end of a command, the contents of this field are updated to the current
cylinder number. The high-order 8 bits of the cylinder address are set to the
Cylinder High Register.
Under the LBA mode, this field indicates LBA bits 23 to 16. Under the LBA
mode of the EXT system command, LBA bits 47 to 40 are set in the Cylinder
High Field, and LBA bits 23 to 16 are set in the Cylinder High Field (exp).
(7) Device/Head Field
The contents of this field indicate the device and the head number.
When executing INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS command, the contents
of this field defines "the number of heads minus 1" (a maximum head No.).
Bit 7
X
Bit 6
L
Bit 5
X
Bit 4
X
Bit 3
HS3
Bit 2
HS2
Bit 1
HS1
Bit 0
HS0
- Bit 7: Unused
- Bit 6:
L
0 for CHS mode and 1 for LBA mode.
- Bit 5: Unused
- Bit 4: Unused
- Bit 3: HS3
CHS mode head address 3 (23). bit 27 for LBA mode.
Unused under the LBA mode of the EXT command.
- Bit 2: HS2
- Bit 1: HS1
- Bit 0: HS0
CHS mode head address 2 (22). bit 26 for LBA mode.
Unused under the LBA mode of the EXT command.
CHS mode head address 1 (21). bit 25 for LBA mode.
Unused under the LBA mode of the EXT command.
CHS mode head address 0 (20). bit 24 for LBA mode.
Unused under the LBA mode of the EXT command.
5-24
C141-E280
5.2 Logical Interface
(8) Status field
The contents of this field indicate the status of the device. The contents of this
field are updated at the completion of each command. When the BSY bit is 1,
other bits of this field, are invalid.
Bit 7
BSY
Bit 6
Bit 5
DF
Bit 4
DSC
Bit 3
DRQ
Bit 2
0
Bit 1
0
Bit 0
ERR
DRDY
- Bit 7:
Busy (BSY) bit
This bit is set whenever the Command filed of the shadow block registers for the host
system is accessed.
Then this bit is cleared when the command is completed. However, even if a command is
being executed, this bit is cleared during the PIO data transfer request.
When BSY bit is 1, the host system should not write the shadow block registers. This bit
is set by the device under following conditions:
(a) After COMRESET or SRST is set in the Device Control Field, the BSY bit is set,
then the BSY bit is cleared, when the COMRESET process is completed.
The BSY bit is set for no longer than 15 seconds after the IDD accepts reset.
Device Ready (DRDY) bit
- Bit 6:
- Bit 5:
This bit indicates that the device is capable to respond to a command.
The IDD checks its status when it receives a command. If an error is detected (not ready
state), the IDD clears this bit to 0. This is cleared to 0 at power-on and it is cleared until the
rotational speed of the spindle motor reaches the steady speed.
Device Write Fault (DF) bit
This bit indicates that a device fault (write fault) condition has been detected.
If a write fault is detected during command execution, this bit is latched and retained until
the device accepts the next command or reset.
- Bit 4:
- Bit 3:
Device Seek Complete (DSC) bit
This bit indicates that the device heads are positioned over a track.
In the IDD, this bit is always set to 1 after the spin-up control is completed.
Data Request (DRQ) bit
This bit indicates that the device is ready to transfer PIO data of word unit or byte unit
between the host system and the device.
- Bit 2:
- Bit 1:
- Bit 0:
Always 0
Always 0
Error (ERR) bit
This bit indicates that an error was detected while the previous command was being
executed. The Error field indicates the additional information of the cause for the error.
C141-E280
5-25
Interface
(9) Command Field
The Command Field contains a command code being sent to the device. After this
field is written, the command execution starts immediately.
Table 5.5 lists the executable commands and their command codes. This table
also lists the necessary parameters for each command that are written to certain
fields before the Command register is written.
(10) Device Control Field
The Device Control Field contains software reset.
Bit 7
X
Bit 6
X
Bit 5
X
Bit 4
X
Bit 3
X
Bit 2
Bit 1
X
Bit 0
0
SRST
- Bit 2:
Software Reset (SRST)
This is the host software reset bit. When this bit is set, the device is held reset state.
The slave device is not required to execute the DASP- handshake.
(11) E_Status Field
This field is in the PIO Setup FIS. The field contents are the same as those
described in (8), "Status Field." However, the values in the Status field are those
before a PIO data transfer, and the values in the E_Status field are those when a
PIO data transfer is completed.
(12) DMA Buffer Offset Field
This field is in the DMA Setup FIS, representing byte offset. Since this device
does not support byte offset, 0 is always set for the field.
(13) DMA Transfer Count Field
This field is in the DMA Setup FIS, representing the number of bytes to be
transferred.
(14) Active Field
This field is in the Set Device Bits FIS. Each bit number corresponds to the tag
number of one of 32 commands that can be placed in a queue, and the bit setting
of "1" indicates that the corresponding command is completed.
5-26
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
5.3 Host Commands
The host system issues a command to the device by writing necessary parameters in
related fields in the shadow block registers and writing a command code in the
Command field of the shadow block registers.
The device can accept the command when the BSY bit is 0 (the device is not in the
busy status).
The host system can halt the uncompleted command execution only at execution of
COMRESET or software reset.
When the BSY bit is 1 or the DRQ bit is 1 (the device is requesting the PIO data
transfer) and the host system writes to the command field of the shadow block
register, the correct device operation is not guaranteed.
5.3.1 Command code and parameters
Table 5.5 lists the supported commands, command code and the related fields to
be written necessary parameters at command execution.
Table 5.5 Command code and parameters (1/3)
COMMAND CODE (Bit)
PARAMETER USED
COMMAND NAME
RECALIBRATE
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
6
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
5
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
4
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
3
X
0
2
X
0
1
X
0
0
X
R
R
0
FR SC SN CY DH
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
D
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
D
READ SECTOR(S)
WRITE SECTOR(S)
0
0
0
WRITE VERIFY
1
1
0
READ VERIFY SECTOR(S)
SEEK
0
0
0
R
X
0
X
0
X
0
X
0
EXECUTE DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC
INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS
DOWNLOAD MICROCODE
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
STANDBY IMMEDIATE
IDLE IMMEDIATE
UNLOAD IMMEDIATE
STANDBY
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
N
Y
Y
N
N
Y
Y
N
D
D
D
D
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
C141-E280
5-27
Interface
Table 5.5 Command code and parameters (2/3)
COMMAND CODE (Bit)
PARAMETER USED
FR SC SN CY DH
COMMAND NAME
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
IDLE
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
D
D
D
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
CHECK POWER MODE
SLEEP
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
SMART
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
D
D
DEVICE CONFIGURATION
READ MULTIPLE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
R
R
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N*
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
D
Y
Y
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
WRITE MULTIPLE
SET MULTIPLE MODE
READ DMA
WRITE DMA
READ BUFFER
FLUSH CACHE
WRITE BUFFER
IDENTIFY DEVICE
IDENTIFY DEVICE DMA
SET FEATURES
SECURITY SET PASSWORD
SECURITY UNLOCK
SECURITY ERASE PREPARE
SECURITY ERASE UNIT
SECURITY FREEZE LOCK
SECURITY DISABLE
PASSWORD
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
N
N
N
N
D
READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS
SET MAX
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
N
N*
N
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
D
Y
D
D
READ SECTOR(S) EXT
READ DMA EXT
N
READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS
EXT
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
N
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
D
D
READ MULTIPLE EXT
5-28
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
Table 5.5 Command code and parameters (3/3)
COMMAND CODE (Bit)
PARAMETER USED
COMMAND NAME
READ LOG EXT
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
4
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
3
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
FR SC SN CY DH
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
D
D
D
Y
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
WRITE SECTOR(S) EXT
WRITE DMA EXT
SET MAX ADDRESS EXT
WRITE MULTIPLE EXT
WRITE DMA FUA EXT
WRITE LOG EXT
READ VERIFY SECTOR(S) EXT
WRITE UNCORRECTABLE EXT
READ LOG DMA EXT
WRITE LOG DMA EXT
READ FP DMA QUEUED
WRITE FP DMA QUEUED
WRITE MULTIPLE FUA EXT
FLUSH CACHE EXT
CY: cylinder field
DH: device/head field
FR: features field
SC: sector count field
SN: sector number field
R:
Retry at error
1 = Without retry
0 = With retry
Y:
Necessary to set parameters
Y*: Necessary to set parameters under the LBA mode
N: Not necessary to set parameters (The parameter is ignored if it is set.)
N*: May set parameters.
D:
X:
The device parameter is valid, and the head parameter is ignored.
Do not care.
C141-E280
5-29
Interface
5.3.2 Command descriptions
The contents of the shadow block registers to be necessary for issuing a command
and the example indication of the shadow block registers at command completion
are shown as following in this subsection.
Example: READ SECTOR (S)
At command issuance
At command completion
(Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
(Shadow Block Registers to be read)
Bit
CM
7
0
x
6
0
5
1
x
4
0
x
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
0
Bit
ST
7
x
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Status information
HD No./LBA
LBA (47-40)
DH
L
HD No./LBA
DH
L
x
x
CH EXP
LBA (47-40)
CH EXP
Start cylinder address
[MSB] / LBA (23-16)
End cylinder address
[MSB] / LBA (23-16)
CH
CL EXP
CL
CH
CL EXP
CL
LBA (39-32)
LBA (39-32)
Start cylinder address
[LSB] / LBA (15-8)
End cylinder address
[LSB] / LBA (15-8)
SN EXP
SN
LBA (31-24)
Start sector No. / LBA (7-0)
Transfer sector count (15-8)
Transfer sector count (7-0)
xx
SN EXP
SN
LBA (31-24)
End sector No. / LBA (7-0)
SC EXP
SC
SC EXP
SC
X '00'
X '00'
FR EXP
FR
ER
Error information
xx
CH (EXP): Cylinder High Field (EXP)
CL (EXP): Cylinder Low Field (EXP)
CM:
DH:
ER:
Command Field
Device/Head Field
Error Field
FR (EXP): Features Field (EXP)
L: LBA (Logical Block Address) setting bit
SN (EXP): Sector Number Field (EXP)
SC (EXP): Sector Count Field (EXP)
ST:
Status Field
x, xx:
Don't care (setting is not necessary).
Note:
1. When the L bit is specified to 1, the lower 4 bits of the DH
field and all bits of the CH field, CL and SN fields indicate
the LBA bits (bits of the DH filed are the MSB (most
significant bit) and bits of the SN field are the LSB (least
significant bit).
2. At error occurrence, the SC field indicates the remaining sector
count of data transfer.
3. Bit indication is omitted in each command description.
5-30
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
(1) RECALIBRATE (X '10' to X '1F')
This command performs the calibration. When the device completes the
calibration, the device reports the status to the host system.
This command can be issued in the LBA mode.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) An error was detected during head positioning (ST = 51h, ER = 02h).
(2) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
0
x
0
x
0
x
1
x
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
Note:
Also executable in LBA mode
C141-E280
5-31
Interface
(2) READ SECTOR(S) (X '20' or X '21')
This command reads data of sectors specified in the Sector Count field from the
address specified in the Device/Head, Cylinder High, Cylinder Low and Sector
Number fields. Number of sectors can be specified from 1 to 256 sectors. To
specify 256 sectors reading, '00' is specified. For the protocols related to data
transfer, see Subsection 5.4.1.
If the head is not on the track specified by the host, the device performs an implied
seek. After the head reaches to the specified track, the device reads the target
sector.
If an error occurs, retry reads are attempted to read the target sector before
reporting an error, irrespective of the R bit setting.
If an error does not occur, PIO Setup is always transferred prior to the data
transfer.
Upon the completion of the command execution, shadow block registers contain
the cylinder, head, and sector addresses (in the CHS mode) or logical block
address (in the LBA mode) of the last sector read.
If an unrecoverable disk read error occurs in a sector, the read operation is terminated
at the sector where the error occurred. Shadow block registers contain the cylinder,
the head, and the sector addresses of the sector (in the CHS mode) or the logical
block address (in the LBA mode) where the error occurred, and remaining number
of sectors of which data was not transferred (including sector when the error
occurred).
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A specified address exceeds the range where read operations are allowed
(ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(2) The range where read operations are allowed will be exceeded by an address
during a read operation (ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(3) An uncorrectable disk read error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 40h).
(4) The sync byte indicating the beginning of a sector was not found
(ST = 51h, ER = 01h).
(5) A communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 0Ch).
(6) An error other than the above errors occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
5-32
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
x
0
1
x
0
x
0
0
0
R
L
HD No. / LBA
CH
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
CL
SN
Start sector No.
Transfer sector count
xx
/ LBA [LSB]
SC
FR
(R: Retry)
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
HD No. / LBA
x
L
x
x
End cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
End cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
End sector No.
/ LBA [LSB]
01 (*1)
Error information
*1 If the command is terminated due to an error, the remaining
number of sectors of which data was not transferred.
C141-E280
5-33
Interface
(3) WRITE SECTOR(S) (X '30' or X '31')
This command writes data of sectors from the address specified in the
Device/Head, Cylinder High, Cylinder Low, and Sector Number fields to the
address specified in the Sector Count field. Number of sectors can be specified
from 1 to 256 sectors. A sector count of 0 requests 256 sectors. Data transfer
begins at the sector specified in the Sector Number field. For the protocols related
to data transfer, see Subsection 5.4.3.
If the head is not on the track specified by the host, the device performs an implied
seek. After the head reaches to the specified track, the device writes the target
sector.
If an error occurs when writing to the target sector, retries are attempted
irrespectively of the R bit setting.
The data stored in the buffer, and CRC code and ECC bytes are written to the data
field of the corresponding sector(s).
Upon the completion of the command execution, the shadow block registers
contain the cylinder, head, and sector addresses of the last sector written.
If a disk error occurs during multiple sector write operation, the write operation is
terminated at the sector where the error occurred. Shadow block registers contain
the cylinder, the head, the sector addresses (in the CHS mode) or the logical block
address (in the LBA mode) of the sector where the error occurred.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A specified address exceeds the range where write operations are allowed
(after a transfer of dummy data, ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(2) The range where write operations are allowed will be exceeded by an address
during a write operation (after a transfer of dummy data, ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(3) A write fault was detected when the write cache was disabled
(ST = 71h, ER = 10h).
(4) While the write cache is enabled, if the status indicating a completed transfer
(STS = 50h) is returned and a data write operation failed because a write fault
was detected during the data write operation, Abort will be returned for all
subsequent ATA commands (ST = 71h, ER = 04h). This state is cleared the
next time that the device is turned on.
(5) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
(6) An error other than the above errors occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
5-34
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
x
0
1
x
1
x
0
0
0
R
L
HD No. / LBA
CH
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
CL
SN
Start sector No.
Transfer sector count
xx
/ LBA [LSB]
SC
FR
(R: Retry)
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
HD No. / LBA
x
L
x
x
End cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
End cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
End sector No.
/ LBA [LSB]
00 (*1)
Error information
*1 If the command was terminated because of an error, the number
of sectors for which data has not been written is set in this field.
C141-E280
5-35
Interface
(4) WRITE VERIFY (X '3C')
This command operates similarly to the WRITE SECTOR(S) command except
that the device verifies each sector immediately after being written. The verify
operation is a read and check for data errors without data transfer. Any error that
is detected during the verify operation is posted.
After all sectors are verified, device reports the status to the host system.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A specified address exceeds the range where write operations are allowed
(after a transfer of dummy data, ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(2) The range where write operations are allowed will be exceeded by an address
during a write operation (after a transfer of dummy data, ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(3) A write fault was detected when the write cache was disabled
(ST = 71h, ER = 10h).
(4) While the write cache is enabled, if the status indicating a completed transfer
(STS = 50h) is returned and a data write operation failed because a write fault
was detected during the data write operation, Abort will be returned for all
subsequent ATA commands (ST = 71h, ER = 04h). This state is cleared the
next time that the device is turned on.
(5) An uncorrectable read error occurred disk (ST = 51h, ER = 40h).
(6) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
(7) An error other than the above errors occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
0
x
0
1
x
1
x
1
1
0
0
L
HDNo. /LBA
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
Start sector No.
Transfer sector count
xx
/ LBA [LSB]
5-36
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
HD No. / LBA
x
L
x
x
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
Start sector No.
/ LBA [LSB]
00 (*1)
Error information
*1 If the command is terminated because of an error, the number of
remaining sectors for which data has not been written or verified is
set in this register.
C141-E280
5-37
Interface
(5) READ VERIFY SECTOR(S) (X '40' or X '41')
This command operates similarly to the READ SECTOR(S) command except that
the data is not transferred to the host system.
After all requested sectors are verified, the device reports the status to the host
system.
Upon the completion of the command execution, the shadow block registers
contain the cylinder, head, and sector number of the last sector verified.
If an unrecoverable disk error occurs, the verify operation is terminated at the
sector where the error occurred. The shadow block registers contain the cylinder,
the head, and the sector addresses (in the CHS mode) or the logical block address
(in the LBA mode) of the sector where the error occurred. The Sector Count field
indicates the number of sectors that have not been verified.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A specified address exceeds the range where read operations are allowed
(ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(2) The range where read operations are allowed will be exceeded by an address
during a read operation (ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(3) An uncorrectable disk read error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 40h).
(4) The sync byte indicating the beginning of a sector was not found
(ST = 51h, ER = 01h).
(5) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
(6) An error other than the above errors occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
0
x
1
0
x
0
x
0
0
0
R
L
HD No. / LBA
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
Start sector No.
Transfer sector count
xx
/ LBA [LSB]
5-38
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
HD No. / LBA
x
L
x
x
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
Start sector No.
/ LBA [LSB]
00 (*1)
Error information
*1 If the command is terminated due to an error, the remaining
number of sectors of which data was not transferred is set in this
register.
C141-E280
5-39
Interface
(6) SEEK (X '70' to X '7F')
This command performs a seek operation to the track and selects the head
specified in the command block registers. After completing the seek operation,
the device reports the status to the host system.
In the LBA mode, this command performs the seek operation to the cylinder and
head position in which the sector is specified.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A specified address exceeds the range where the head can be positioned
(ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(2) Head positioning is not possible because an error occurred
(ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(3) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
0
x
1
1
x
1
x
x
x
x
x
L
HD No. / LBA
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
Start sector No.
/ LBA [LSB]
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
HD No. / LBA
x
L
x
x
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
Start sector No.
/ LBA [LSB]
xx
Error information
5-40
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
(7) EXECUTE DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC (X '90')
This command performs an internal diagnostic test (self-diagnosis) of the device.
The device reports the diagnostic result and status to the host.
Table 5.6 lists the diagnostic code written in the Error field which is 8-bit code.
Table 5.6 Diagnostic code
Code
Result of diagnostic
Format Unit is not completed.
X '00'
X '01'
X '02'
X '03'
X '04'
X '05'
X '06'
No error detected.
HDC diagnostic error
Data buffer diagnostic error
Memory diagnostic error
Reading the system area is abnormal.
Calibration abnormal
Note:
The device responds to this command with the result of
power-on diagnostic test.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
0
x
0
x
1
x
0
0
0
0
HD No. /LBA
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
HD No. /LBA
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
01H
01H
Diagnostic code
C141-E280
5-41
Interface
(8) INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS (X '91')
The host system can set the number of sectors per track and the maximum head
number (maximum head number is "number of heads minus 1") per cylinder with
this command. Upon receipt of this command, the device sets the parameters.
Then the device reports the status to the host system.
When the SC field is specified to X '00', an ABORTED COMMAND error is
posted. Other than X '00' is specified, this command terminates normally.
The parameters set by this command are retained even after soft reset and
COMRESET issuance or power save operation regardless of the setting of
disabling the reverting to default setting.
The operation is always performed in CHS mode, with the command ignoring any
setting of LBA mode.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) "00h" is specified in the SC field (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
0
x
0
x
1
x
0
0
0
1
Max. head No.
xx
xx
xx
Number of sectors/track
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
Max. head No.
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
Number of sectors/track
Error information
5-42
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
(9) DOWNLOAD MICROCODE (X '92')
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
1
1
0
x
0
1
1
x
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
Sector Offset (15-8)
CL
Sector Offset (7-0)
SN
SC
FR
Sector count (15-8)
Sector count (7-0)
Subcommand code
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
1
x
1
x
0
0
0
0
00
00
xx
xx
Error information
This command rewrites the microcode of the device (firmware).
When this command is accepted, the device does beginning the data transfer of the
microcode or the microcode rewriting according to Subcommand code (Rewriting is
also possible simultaneously with the data transfer). Refer to Table 5.7.
In the data transfer of Subcommand code 01h and 03h transfer by which data is
divided into multiple times is possible. Refer to Table 5.8.
After the designation of rewriting by Subcommand code 07h, reactivates in the
device for the update of the rewriting microcode of the microcode.
C141-E280
5-43
Interface
Table 5.7 Operation of DOWNLOAD MICROCODE
Host Command
Movement of device
Sector Offset
*1
(CH, CL Field)
Subcommand
code
(FR Field)
Sector count
(SN, SC Field) transfer
Data
Microcode rewriting execution
0000h
xxxxh
0000h
xxxxh
0000h
xxxxh
Non
It is.
Non
It is.
Non
It is.
Rewriting execution reservation
Rewriting execution reservation
Rewriting execution reservation
Rewriting execution reservation
Execution. *2
01h
03h
07h
----
xxxxh
----
Execution. *2
Excluding 01h,
03h
Abort
−
and 07h
*1: When FR Field = 03 (Mode3) is specified, Abort is returned as an error when
the specification of doing Sector Offset (CH, CL Field) is the transfer end the
last sector and is not consecutive.
Moreover, Sector Offset (CH, CL Field) is invalid in specification other than
FR Field = 03 (Mode3).
*2: In the following cases, Subcommand code = 07h returns Abort as an error
though becomes Microcode rewriting execution specification.
1) Abnormality of the transmitted Microcode data is detected.
2) The data transfer is not done (The number of transfer: 0).
3) The DOWNLOAD MICROCODE command is not continuously issued when
the transfer has been divided into multiple transfers.
5-44
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
Table 5.8 Example of rewriting procedure of data 640K Bytes (A0000h Bytes)
of microcode
Transfer example 1:
Transfer of 128 KB (0 to 127 KB) from the
beginning
1) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0100h FR = 0lh
Transfer from 128 to 255 KB
Transfer from 256 to 383 KB
Transfer from 384 to 511 KB
Transfer from 512 to 639 KB
Firmware rewriting execution
2) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0100h FR = 0lh
3) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0100h FR = 0lh
4) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0100h FR = 0lh
5) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0100h FR = 0lh
6) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0000h FR = 07h
Transfer example 2:
1) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0500h FR = 0lh
2) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0000h FR = 07h
Transfer example 3:
Transfer of 640 KB
Firmware rewriting execution
1) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0500h FR = 07h
Transfer of 640 KB and Firmware rewriting
execution
Transfer example 4:
1) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0100h FR = 0lh
Transfer of 128 KB (0 to 127 KB) from the
beginning
2) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0100h FR = 0lh
3) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0100h FR = 0lh
4) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0100h FR = 0lh
5) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0100h FR = 07h
Transfer from 128 to 255 KB
Transfer from 256 to 383 KB
Transfer from 384 to 511 KB
Transfer from 512 to 639 KB and Firmware
rewriting execution
The Aborted Command error is reported if any of the following conditions is
satisfied: transferred microcode data is incorrect, firmware rewriting is specified
before microcode data is transferred, or the DOWNLOAD MICROCODE
command is not issued continuously when the transfer has been divided into
multiple transfers.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) When the transferred Micro code data error occurs (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) When writing is specified though the data has not transferred yet.
(ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(3) When the Sector Offset(CH,CL Field) specification is the transfer end the last
sector and is not consecutive by the command of Mode3
(ST = 51h, ER = 04h)
(4) When the SATA frame error occurs. (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
(5) When detect the error other than the above mentioned.
(ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
C141-E280
5-45
Interface
(10) STANDBY IMMEDIATE (X '94' or X 'E0')
Upon receipt of this command, the device enters the standby mode. The device
then reports the status to the host system. This command does not support the
APS timer function.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
X '94' or X 'E0'
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
5-46
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
(11) IDLE IMMEDIATE (X '95' or X 'E1')/UNLOAD IMMEDIATE (X '95' or X 'E1')
•
Default Function
Upon receipt of this command, the device enters the idle mode. Then, the device
reports the status to the host system. This command does not support the APS
timer function.
Error reporting conditions
(1) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
X '95' or X 'E1'
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
C141-E280
5-47
Interface
•
Unload Feature (Unload Immediate Command):
When the device received the IDLE IMMEDIATE command with the UNLOAD
FEATURE, the head(s) is unloaded to the ramp position. After the device
completed the unload operation, the INTRQ signal will be asserted and the BUSY
flag will be cleared. The time until the head(s) unload to the ramp position is
typically less than 500 milliseconds. This unload operation is not same as the
power management operation. The device just unloads the head(s), and not
executes the power consumption restraint operation. This unload operation effects
the normal (not emergency) load/unload guarantee count per the device life.
Even if the device executes reading look-ahead operation or executes writing
operation, the device unloads the head(s) to the ramp position as soon as possible
when received the IDLE IMMEDIATE command with the Unload Feature. When
the writing operation is stopped, the device keeps the unwritten data. And, the
device keeps the unloaded state until receiving a Soft Reset/ COMRESET, or a
new command except IDLE IMMEDIATE command with the Unload Feature.
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
X 'E1'
x
x
x
x
xx
X '55'
X '4E'
X '4C'
xx
X '44'
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
X 'C4'
xx
Error information
5-48
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
(12) STANDBY (X '96' or X 'E2')
Upon receipt of this command, the device enters the standby mode. If the device
has already spun down, the spin-down sequence is not implemented.
If the Sector Count field has a value other than "0," the APS timer is set when the
command is received. When the device receives the command involving a seek
such as media access command, the device processes the command after transition
to Active mode. After that, the device enters the command waiting state, and the
timer starts to count down. If a command is not received within the period
specified as the APS timer value, the device automatically enters Standby mode.
If the Sector Count field value is "0" the APS timer is disabled when the command
is received.
Under the standby mode, the spindle motor is stopped. Thus, when the command
involving a seek such as READ SECTOR(s) command is received, the device
processes the command after driving the spindle motor.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
X '96' or X 'E2'
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
Period of timer
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
C141-E280
5-49
Interface
(13) IDLE (X '97' or X 'E3')
Upon receipt of this command, the device enters the idle mode. The device
reports the status even if the device has not fully entered the idle mode. If the
spindle of the device is already rotating, the spin-up sequence shall not be
implemented.
By using this command, the APS (Automatic Power Standby) timer function is
enabled and the timer immediately starts the countdown. When the timer reaches
the specified value, the device enters standby mode. The APS timer is set to
prohibition if the Sector Count field's value was "0" when device has received this
command.
The period of timer count is set depending on the value of the Sector Count
register as shown below.
Sector Count field value
[X '00']
Point of timer
Timeout disabled
0
1 to 240
241 to 251 [X 'F1' to X 'FB']
[X '01' to X 'F0']
(Value × 5) seconds
((Value-240) × 30) min
21 minutes
252
253
[X 'FC']
[X 'FD']
8 hrs
254 to 255 [X 'FE' to X 'FF']
21 minutes 15 seconds
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
X '97' or X 'E3'
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
Period of timer
xx
5-50
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
C141-E280
5-51
Interface
(14) CHECK POWER MODE (X '98' or X 'E5')
The host checks the power mode of the device with this command.
The host system can confirm the power save mode of the device by the contents of
the Sector Count field after executing this command.
The device sets the following field value. After that, the device reports the status
to the host system.
Power save mode
Sector Count field
X '00'
• During moving to Standby mode
• Standby mode
• Idle mode
X 'FF'
X 'FF'
• Active mode
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
X '98' or X 'E5'
x
x
x
x
xx
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
Status information
x
DH
x
x
x
xx
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
xx
xx
xx
X '00' or X 'FF'
Error information
5-52
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
(15) SLEEP (X '99' or X 'E6')
This command is the only way to make the device enter the sleep mode.
Upon receipt of this command, the device enters the sleep mode, then reports the
status to the host system. The device reports the status even if the device has not
fully entered the sleep mode.
In the sleep mode, the spindle motor is stopped.
The only way to release the device from sleep mode is to execute a software or
COMRESET.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
X '99' or X 'E6'
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
C141-E280
5-53
Interface
(16) SMART (X 'B0')
This command predicts the occurrence of device failures depending on the
subcommand specified in the Features field. If the Features field contains values
that are not supported with the command, the Aborted Command error is issued.
Before issuing the command, the host must set the key values in the Cylinder Low
and Cylinder High field (4Fh in the Cylinder Low field and C2h in the Cylinder
High field). If the key values are incorrect, the Aborted Command error is issued.
If the failure prediction function is disabled, the device returns the Aborted
Command error to subcommands other than those of the SMART Enable
Operations (with the Features field set to D8h).
If the failure prediction function is enabled, the device collects and updates data on
specific items. The values of items whose data is collected and updated by the
device in order to predict device failures are hereinafter referred to as attribute
values.
5-54
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
Table 5.9 Features Field values (subcommands) and functions (1/3)
Features Field
X 'D0'
Function
SMART READ DATA:
A device that received this subcommand saves all the updated attribute
values. The device then transfers 512-byte attribute value information to the
host after transferring PIOSU.
* For information about the format of the attribute value information, see
Table 5.10.
X 'D1'
X 'D2'
SMART READ ATTRIBUTE THRESHOLDS:
This subcommand is used to transfer 512-byte guarantee failure threshold
value data to the host.
* For information about the format of the guarantee failure threshold value
data, see Table 5.11.
SMART ENABLE/DISABLE ATTRIBUTE AUTOSAVE:
Enables (by setting the Sector Count field to a value other than 00h) or disables
(by setting the Sector Count field to 00h) a function that automatically saves
device attribute values ("automatic attribute save function"). This setting is
held regardless of whether the device is turned on or off. If the automatic
attribute save function is enabled and more than 15 minutes has elapsed since
the last time that attributes were saved, then the attributes are saved.
However, if the automatic attribute save function is disabled, the attributes
are not saved. Upon receiving this subcommand, a device enables or
disables the automatic attribute save function, and transfers the RegDH, then
reports the status.
In this drive, this function is enabled at the shipment from the factory.
SMART SAVE ATTRIBUTE VALUES:
X 'D3'
X 'D4'
When the device receives this subcommand, if saves device attribute value
data, and transfers the RegDH, then reports the status.
SMART EXECUTIVE OFF-LINE IMMEDIATE:
A device which receives this command starts collecting the off-line data
specified in the Sector Number field, or stops.
In the off-line mode, after transferring the RegDH, off-line data are
collected. In the captive mode, it collects off-line data then transfers the
RegDH when collection of data is completed.
SN Off-line data collection mode
00h: Off-line diagnosis (off-line mode)
01h: Simple self-test (off-line mode)
02h: Comprehensive self-test (off-line mode)
03h: Conveyance self-test (off-line mode)
04h: Selective self-test (off-line mode)
7Fh: Self-test stop
81h: Simple self-test (captive mode)
82h: Comprehensive self-test (captive mode)
83h: Conveyance self-test (captive mode)
84h: Selective self-test (captive mode)
C141-E280
5-55
Interface
Table 5.9 Features Field values (subcommands) and functions (2/3)
Features Field
X 'D5'
Function
SMART READ LOG:
A device which receives this sub-command reads the log sector specified in
the Sector Number Field. Next, it transfers the PIOSU and transmits the log
sector to the host computer.
SN:
SC:
Log sector
00h:
01h:
02h:
06h:
09h:
01h:
01h:
33h:
01h:
01h:
SMART log directory
SMART summary error log
SMART comprehensive error log
SMART self-test log
SMART selective self-test log
80h-9Fh: 01h-10h: Host vendor log
E0h:
E1h:
01h:
SCT Status Request
SCT Read Data
* See Table 5.18 concerning the SMART error log data format.
See Table 5.20 concerning the SMART self-test log data format.
See Table 5.21 concerning the SMART selective self-test log data
format.
See Table 5.24 concerning the SCT Status Request data format.
X 'D6'
SMART WRITE LOG:
A device which receives this sub-command, when it has prepared to receive
data from the host computer, it transfers the PIOSU. Next, it receives data
from the host computer and writes the specified log sector in the Sector
Number Field.
SN:
SC:
Log sector
09h:
01h:
SMART selective self-test log
80h-9Fh: 01h-10h Host vendor log
E0h:
E1h:
01h:
SCT Command Set
SCT Read Data
* The host can write any desired data in the host vendor log.
See Table 5.27 to 5.30 concerning the SCT Command Set data format.
X 'D8'
SMART ENABLE OPERATIONS:
This subcommand enables SMART. The setting is maintained even when
the device is turned off and then on.
When the device receives this subcommand, it enables SMART, then
transfers the RegDH.
5-56
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
Table 5.9 Features Field values (subcommands) and functions (3/3)
Features Field
X 'D9'
Function
SMART DISABLE OPERATIONS:
This subcommand disables SMART. The setting is maintained even when
the device is turned off and then on.
When the device receives this subcommand, it disables SMART, then
transfers the RegDH.
X 'DA'
SMART RETURN STATUS:
When the device receives this subcommand, it saves the current device attribute
values. Then the device compares the device attribute values with guarantee
failure threshold values. If there is an attribute value exceeding the threshold,
F4h and 2Ch are loaded into the Cylinder Low and Cylinder High field. If there
are no attribute values exceeding the thresholds, 4Fh and C2h are loaded into
the Cylinder Low and Cylinder High field. After the settings for the Cylinder
Low and Cylinder High field have been determined, the device transfers the
RegDH.
X 'DB'
SMART ENABLE/DISABLE AUTO OFF-LINE:
This sets automatic off-line data collection in the enabled (when the Sector
Count field specification ≠ 00h) or disabled (when the Sector Count field
specification = 00) state. This setting is preserved whether the drive's power
is switched on or off.
If 24 hours have passed since the power was switched on, or since the last
time that off-line data were collected, off-line data collection is performed
without relation to any command from the host computer.
The host must regularly issue the SMART READ DATA subcommand (Features
field = D0h), SMART SAVE ATTRIBUTE VALUES subcommand (Features
field = D3h), or SMART RETURN STATUS subcommand (Features field = DAh)
to save the device attribute value data on a medium.
Alternative, the device must issue the SMART ENABLE-DISABLE ATTRIBUTE
AUTOSAVE subcommand (Features field = D2h) to use a feature which regularly
saves the device attribute value data to a medium.
In this drive, this function is enabled at the shipment from the factory.
The host can predict failures in the device by periodically issuing the SMART
RETURN STATUS subcommand (Features field = DAh) to reference the Cylinder
Low and Cylinder High field.
If an attribute value is below the guarantee failure threshold value, the device is
about to fail or the device is nearing the end of its life. In this case, the host
recommends that the user quickly back up the data.
C141-E280
5-57
Interface
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
0
x
1
x
1
x
0
0
0
0
xx
Key (C2h)
Key (4Fh)
xx
xx
Subcommand
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
Key-failure prediction status (C2h/2Ch)
Key-failure prediction status (4Fh/F4h)
xx
xx
Error information
The attribute value information is 512-byte data; the format of this data is shown
the following Table 5.10. The host can access this data using the SMART READ
DATA subcommand (Features field = D0h). The guarantee failure threshold value
data is 512-byte data; the format of this data is shown the following Table 5.11.
The host can access this data using the SMART READ ATTRIBUTE
THRESHOLDS subcommand (Features field = D1h).
5-58
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
Table 5.10 Format of device attribute value data
Byte(hex)
00, 01
02
Item
Data format version number
Attribute 1
Attribute ID
03, 04
05
Status flag
Current attribute value
Attribute value for worst case so far
Raw attribute value
Reserved
06
07 to 0C
0D
0E to 169
Attribute 2 to
attribute 30
(The format of each attribute value is the same as
that of Bytes 02 to 0D.)
16A
16B
Off-line data collection status
Self-test execution status
16C, 16D
16E
Off-line data collection execution time [sec.]
Reserved
16F
Off-line data collection capability
Trouble prediction capability flag
Error logging capability
170, 171
172
173
(Self-test error detection point)
Simple self-test (Quick Test) execution time [min.]
174
175
Comprehensive self-test (Comprehensive Test) execution time
[min.]
176
Conveyance self-test execution time [min.]
177 to 181
182 to 1FE
1FF
Reserved
Vendor unique
Check sum
Table 5.11 Format of guarantee failure threshold value data
Byte(hex)
Item
00, 01
02
Data format version number
Threshold 1
Attribute ID
03
Guarantee failure threshold
Reserved
04 to 0D
0E to 169
Threshold 2 to
Threshold 30
(The format of each threshold value is the same as
that of bytes 02 to 0D.)
16A to 17B
17C to 1FE
1FF
Reserved
Vendor unique
Check sum
C141-E280
5-59
Interface
•
Data format version number
The data format version number indicates the version number of the data format of
the device attribute values or guarantee failure thresholds. The data format
version numbers of the device attribute values and guarantee failure thresholds are
the same. When a data format is changed, the data format version numbers are
updated.
•
Attribute ID
The attribute ID is defined as follows:
Attribute ID
Attribute name
(Indicates unused attribute data.)
Read Error Rate
0
1
2
Throughput Performance
Spin Up Time
3
4
Start/Stop Count
5
Reallocated Sector Count
Seek Error Rate
7
8
Seek Time Performance
Power-On Hours Count
Spin Retry Count
9
10
12
Drive Power Cycle Count
Emergency Retract Cycle Count
Load/Unload Cycle Count
HDA Temperature
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
(199)
200
203
240
ECC On the Fly Count
Reallocated Event Count
Current Pending Sector Count
Off-Line Scan Uncorrectable Sector Count
(Ultra ATA CRC Error Count)
Write Error Rate
Run Out
Transfer Error Rate
*
If the device receives the reset during
transferring the data, the transfer error is
counted up.
5-60
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
•
Status Flag
Bit
0
Meaning
If this bit is 1, it indicates normal operations are assured with the
attribute when the attribute value exceeds the threshold value.
1
If this bit is 1 (0), it indicates the attribute only updated by an on-
line test (off-line test).
2
3
4
If this bit 1, it indicates the attribute that represents performance.
If this bit 1, it indicates the attribute that represents an error rate.
If this bit 1, it indicates the attribute that represents the number of
occurrences.
5
If this bit 1, it indicates the attribute that can be collected/saved
even if SMART is disabled.
6 to 15
Reserve bit
•
Current attribute value
It indicates the normalized value of the original attribute value. The value deviates
in a range of 01h to 64h (range of 01h to C8h for the Ultra ATA CRC error rate
and communication error rate). It indicates that the closer the value is to 01h, the
higher the possibility of a failure. The host compares the attribute value with the
threshold value. If the attribute value is larger than the threshold value, the drive
is determined to be normal.
•
Attribute value for the worst case so far
This is the worst attribute value among the attribute values collected to data. This
value indicates the state nearest to a failure so far.
•
•
Raw attribute value
Raw attributes data is retained.
Off-line data collection status
C141-E280
5-61
Interface
Table 5.12 Off-line data collection status
Status Byte
Meaning
00h or 80h Off-line data collection is not executed.
02h or 82h Off-line data collection has ended without an error.
04h or 84h Off-line data collection is interrupted by a command from the host.
05h or 85h Off-line data collection has ended before completion because of a
command from the host.
06h or 86h Off-line data collection has ended before completion because of an
error that makes collection impossible. (Not used)
40 to 7Fh
Vendor unique (Not used)
C0h to FFh
01h or 81h
03h or 83h
07h or 3Fh
87h to BFh
Reserved
•
Self-test execution status
Table 5.13 Self-test execution status
Bit
0 to 3:
Meaning
Remainder of the self-test is indicated as a percentage in a range
of "0h to 9h" (corresponding to 0 to 90 %).
4 to 7:
= 0h:
Self-test execution status
Self-test has ended successfully, or self-test has not been
executed.
= 1h:
= 2h:
= 3h:
= 4h:
Self-test is suspended by the host.
Self-test is interrupted by a soft reset/COMRESET from the host.
Self-test cannot be executed.
Self-test has ended with an abnormality because of unknown
contents.
= 5h:
= 6h:
= 7h:
Self-test has ended with "Write/Read Test" error.
Self-test has ended with "Servo Check," error.
Self-test has ended with "SMART Drive Error Log Check,"
"Random Read Test," "Adjacent G-List Test, " or "Read Scan
Test" error.
= 8h:
Self-test has ended with "Pre-SMART Check," or "Post-SMART
Check" error.
= 9h to Eh: Reserved
= Fh: Self-test is in progress.
5-62
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
•
Off-line data collection capability
Indicates the method of off-line data collection carried out by the drive. If the off-
line data collection capability is 0, it indicates that off-line data collection is not
supported.
Table 5.14 Off-line data collection capability
Bit
0
Meaning
If this bit is 1, it indicates that the SMART EXECUTE OFF-
LINE IMMEDATE sub-command (Features field = D4h) is
supported.
1
2
Vendor unique
If this bit is 1, it indicates that offline data collection under
execution is aborted when a new command is received.
3
4
5
6
7
If this bit is 1, it indicates that the SMART Off-line Read
Scanning Technology is supported.
If this bit is 1, it indicates that the SMART Self-test function
is supported.
If this bit is 1, it indicates that the SMART Conveyance Self-
test is supported.
If this bit is 1, it indicates that the SMART Selective Self-test
is supported.
Reserved bits
•
Failure prediction capability flag
Table 5.15 Failure prediction capability flag
Bit
0
Meaning
If this bit is 1, it indicates that the attribute value is saved on
media before the drive enters the power save mode.
1
If this bit is 1, it indicates that the attribute value is saved
automatically after the pre-set operation of the drive.
2 to 15
Reserved bits
C141-E280
5-63
Interface
•
Error logging capability
Table 5.16 Drive error logging capability
Bit
0
Meaning
If this bit is 1, it indicates that the drive error logging
function is supported.
1 to 7
Reserved bits
•
•
Checksum
Two's complement of the lower byte, obtained by adding 511-byte data one byte at
a time from the beginning.
Guarantee failure threshold
The limit of a varying attribute value. The host compares the attribute values with
the thresholds to identify a failure.
Table 5.17 Log Directory Data Format
Byte(hex)
00, 01
02
Item
SMART Logging Version
Number of sectors of Address "01h"
Reserved
03
04
Number of sectors of Address "02h"
05 to 0B
Reserved
0C
0D to 11
12
Number of sectors of Address "06h"
Reserved
Number of sectors of Address "09h"
Reserved
13 to FF
100
Number of sector
Address 80h
101
Reserved
Address 81h
to
Address 9Fh
"102" and "13F" are both the same
format as "100-101"
102 to 13F
140 to 1FF
Reserved
5-64
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
•
SMART error logging
If the device detects an unrecoverable error during execution of a command
received from the host, the device registers the error information in the SMART
Summary Error Log (see Table 5.18) and the SMART Comprehensive Error Log
(see Table 5.19), and saves the information on media.
The host issues the SMART Read Log Sector sub-command (Features field = D5h,
Sector Number field = 01h, Sector Count field = 01h) and can read the SMART
Summary Error Log.
The host issues the SMART Read Log Sector sub-command (Features field = D5h,
Sector Number field = 02h, Sector Count field = 33h) and can read the SMART
Comprehensive Error Log.
Table 5.18 Data format of SMART Summary Error Log (1/2)
Byte(hex)
Item
00
01
Version of this function
Pointer for the latest "Error Log Data Structure"
Forth last command data structure
Third last command data structure
Second last command data structure
Last command data structure
Device Control field value
02 to 0D
0E to 19
1A to 25
26 to 31
32
33
Features field value
Error log data
structure
34
Sector Count field value
Sector Number field value
Cylinder Low field value
Cylinder High field value
Drive/Head field value
Command field value
35
Command data
structure
36
37
38
39
Elapsed time after the power-on
sequence (unit: ms)
3A to 3D
C141-E280
5-65
Interface
Table 5.18 Data format of SMART Summary Error Log (2/2)
Byte(hex)
Item
3E
3E
Reserved
Reserved
3F
Error field value
Sector Count field value
Sector Number field value
40
41
42
Cylinder Low field value
Error data structure
43
Cylinder High field value
44
Drive/Head field value
Status field value
Vendor unique
45
46 to 58
59
State
5A, 5B
Power-on time (unit: h)
Error log data structure 2
to
5C to 1C3
Error log data structure 5
1C4, 1C5 Total number of drive errors
1C6 to 1FE Reserved
1FF
Check sum
•
Command data structure
Indicates the command received when an error occurs.
•
•
•
Error data structure
Indicates the status register when an error occurs.
Total number of drive errors
Indicates total number of errors registered in the error log.
Checksum
Two's complement of the lower byte, obtained by adding 511-byte data one byte at a
time from the beginning.
5-66
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
•
Status
Bits 0 to 3: Indicates the drive status when received error commands according
to the following table.
Bits 4 to 7: Vendor unique
Status
Meaning
0
Unclear status
Sleep status
1
2
3
Standby status
Active status (BSY bit = 0)
Off-line data collection being executed
Reserved
4
5 to F
Table 5.19 Data format of SMART Comprehensive Error Log
Byte(hex)
First sector
Next sector
00
01
SMART Error Logging 01h
Reserved
Reserved
Index Pointer Latest Error Data Structure
1st Error Log Data Structure
2nd Error Log Data Structure2
3rd Error Log Data Structure3
4th Error Log Data Structure4
5thError Log Data Structure5
02 to 5B
Error Log Data Structure 5n+1
Error Log Data Structure 5n+2
Error Log Data Structure 5n+3
Error Log Data Structure 5n+4
Error Log Data Structure 5n+5
5C to B5
B6 to 10F
110 to 169
16A to 1C3
1C4 to 1C5 Total number of drive errors
1C6 to 1FE Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Check sum
1FF
Check sum
"n" indicates sector number in the Error Log. The first sector is 0.
•
SMART Self-Test
The host computer can issue the SMART Execute Off-line Immediate sub-command
(Features field = D4h) and cause the device to execute a self-test. When the self-test
is completed, the device saves the SMART self-test log to the disk medium.
The host computer can issue the SMART Read Log Sector sub-command
(Features field = D5h, Sector Number field = 06h, Sector Count field = 01h) and
can read the SMART self-test log.
C141-E280
5-67
Interface
Table 5.20 SMART self-test log data format
Byte(hex)
Item
00, 01
02
Self-test log data structure
Self-test log 1
Self-test number (Sector Number field Value)
03
Self-test execution status
Life time. Total power-on time [hours]
Self-test error No.
04, 05
06
07 to 0A
0B to 19
Error LBA
Vendor unique
(Each log data format is the same as that in
byte 02 to 19.)
1A to 1F9 Self-test log 2 to 21
1FA, 1FB Vendor unique
1FC
Self-test index
1FD, 1FE Reserved
1FF
Check sum
•
•
•
•
Self-test number
Indicates the type of self-test executed.
Self-test execution status
Same as byte 16Bh of the attribute value.
Self-test index
If this is "00h", it indicates the status where the self-test has never been executed.
Checksum
Two's complement of the lower byte, obtained by adding 511-byte data one byte at a
time from the beginning.
5-68
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
Table 5.21 Selective self-test log data structure
Byte(hex)
Item
00, 01
02 to 09
0A to 11
12 to 19
1A to 21
22 to 29
2A to 31
32 to 39
3A to 41
42 to 49
4A to 51
52 to 151
152 to 1EB
1EC to 1F3
1F4 to 1F5
1F6 to 1F7
1F8
Data Structure Revision Number
Starting LBA
Test Span 1
Ending LBA
Starting LBA
Test Span 2
Ending LBA
Starting LBA
Test Span 3
Ending LBA
Starting LBA
Test Span 4
Ending LBA
Starting LBA
Test Span 5
Ending LBA
Reserved
Vender Unique
Current LBA under test
Current Span under test
Feature Flags
Offline Execution Flag
Selective Offline Scan Number
Reserved
Vender Unique
1F9
1FA, 1FB
1FC, 1FD
1FE, 1FF
Selective Self-test pending time [min]
Checksum
•
•
Test Span
Selective self-test log provides for the definition of up to five test spans. If the
starting and ending LBA values for a test span are both zero, a test span is not
defined and not tested.
Current LBA under test
As the self-test progress, the device shall modify this value to contain the LBA
currently being tested.
C141-E280
5-69
Interface
•
Current Span under test
As the self-test progress, the device shall modify this value to contain the test span
number currently being tested.
•
Feature Flags
Table 5.22 Selective self-test feature flags
Bit
Description
0
Vendor specific (unused)
1
When set to one, perform off-line scan after selective test.
Vendor specific (unused)
2
3
4
When set to one, off-line scan after selective test is pending.
When set to one, off-line scan after selective test is active.
Reserved
5 to 15
Bit [l] shall be written by the host and returned unmodified by the device. Bit [3:4]
shall be written as zeros by the host and the device shall modify them as the test
progress.
•
•
Selective Self-test pending time [min]
The selective self-test pending time is the time in minutes from power-on to the
resumption of the off-line testing if the pending bit is set.
SMART Command Transport (SCT)
This command supports the following functions by using the SMART command
according to the value specified for the SN field and the FR field. Moreover,
WRITE LOG EXT/READ LOG EXT is used in 48-CMD environment.
5-70
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
Table 5.23 SCT command and the function
Sector Number
field
Features field
Function
SCT STATUS REQUEST:
X 'E0'
X 'D5'
X 'D6'
A device that received this subcommand transfers Status
information of SCT in 512 bytes to the host.
* For information about the format of the SCT Status, see
Table 5.24.
X 'E0'
SCT COMMAND SET:
A device that received this subcommand and the Key Sector
Format data of 512 bytes is received from the host, and a
device execute the specific operation for which the action
code.
* For information about the format of the Key Sector
Format, see Table 5.27 to Table 5.30.
X 'E1'
X 'E1'
X 'D5'
X 'D6'
SCT READ DATA:
A device that received this subcommand transfers the data
table of the number of sectors specified with Sector Count
field to the host. It is necessary to issue the SCT
COMMAND SET immediately before when this command is
issued.
SCT WRITE DATA:
A device that received this subcommand and the Data Table
of the number of sectors specified with Sector Count field
from the host, and a device execute the write operation. It is
necessary to issue the SCT COMMAND SET immediately
before when this command is issued.
C141-E280
5-71
Interface
•
SCT STATUS REQUEST (SN = E0h, FR = D5h)
This command is used to know the status data of SCT shown in Table 5.24 of the
device.
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
0
x
1
x
1
0
0
0
0
DV
xx
Key (C2h)
Key (4Fh)
E0h
01h
D5h
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
DV
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
5-72
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
Table 5.24 Format of SCT STATUS Response (1/2)
Byte(hex)
Contents
00, 01
02, 03
04, 05
Format Version
SCT Version
SCT Spec
Status Flag
Bit31-1: Reserved
Bit0: Initialized flag (maintained Power-OFF/ON)
0 = When any user LBA is written, this bit is cleared.
06 to 09
This bit is also cleared if the capacity of the drive is changed via
SET MAX (EXT), DCO.
1= A WRITE SAME command to all logical blocks has completed
without error.
Drive State
00h = Active
01h = not support (Standby).
02h = not support (Sleep).
0A
03h = DST executing in background
04h = SMART Off-line Data collection executing in background
05h = SCT command executing in background
06h-FFh = Reserved
0B to 0D Reserved
Extended Status Code
0E, 0F
Status of last SCT command issued
* (See Table 5.25)
Action Code
10, 11
12, 13
Action code of last SCT command issued
Function Code
Function code of last SCT command issued
C141-E280
5-73
Interface
Table 5.24 Format of SCT STATUS Response (2/2)
Byte(hex)
Contents
14 to 27
Reserved
28 to 2F
30 to C7
Current LBA of SCT command executing in background
Reserved
HDA Temp [°C]
C8
C9
Current drive HDA temperature
Minimum HDA temperature in this power cycle
Max Temp [°C]
CA
CB
CC
Maximum HDA temperature in this power cycle
Minimum HDA temperature for the life of the device
Life Max Temp [°C]
Maximum HDA temperature for the life of the device
CD
Reserved
CE to D1
D2 to D5
Over Limit Count (HDA temperature)
Under Limit Count (HDA temperature)
D6 to 1DF Reserved
1E0 to 1FF Vender specific
5-74
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
Table 5.25 SCT STATUS code
Code(hex)
Definition
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
Command completed without error
Invalid Function Code
Input LBA out of range
Request sector count over flow
Invalid Function Code in Error Recovery Control command
Invalid Selection Code in Error Recovery Control command
Host read command timer is less than minimum value.
Host write command timer is less than minimum value.
Background SCT command was aborted because of an interrupting
host command.
0008
Background SCT command was terminated because of
unrecoverable error.
0009
000A
000B
Invalid function code in LONG SECTOR ACCESS command
SCT data transfer command was issued without first issuing an SCT
command.
000C
000D
000E
Invalid function code in Feature Control command
Invalid Feature Code in Feature Control command
Invalid New State in Feature Control command
000F
0010
Invalid Option Flag in Feature Control command
Invalid Action Code
0011
0012
0013
Invalid Table ID
Command was aborted due to drive security being locked.
Invalid revision code
Foreground SCT operation was terminated because of
unrecoverable error.
0014
0015
SCT Error Recovery Timeout occurred.
0016 to BFFF Reserved
C000 to FFFE Vender specific
C141-E280
5-75
Interface
•
SCT COMMAND SET (SN = E0h, FR = D6)
This command transfers Key Sector Format in 512 bytes including the action code
shown in Table 5.26 to the device, and executes each function to show in Table
5.27 to Table 5.30.
28-bit command
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
0
x
1
x
1
0
0
0
0
DV
xx
Key (C2h)
Key (4Fh)
E0h
01h
D6h
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
DV
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
5-76
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
Table 5.26 Action code
Code(hex)
Function
Data transfer
0000
0001
Reserved
-
-
Not supported
WRITE SAME
See Table 5.27.
0002
0003
0004
Write
ERROR RECOVERY CONTROL
See Table 5.28.
-
-
FEATURE CONTROL
See Table 5.29.
SCT DATA TABLE
See Table 5.30.
0005
Read
-
0006 to BFFF Reserved
C000 to FFFF Vender specific
-
Table 5.27 WRITE SAME (1/2)
Byte(hex)
00, 01
Name
Value
0002h
Description
Action Code
WRITE SAME
Repeat Write Pattern
0001h
0002h
It initializes it by data pattern of 32bit specified with
byte 014h-017h.
Repeat Write data block
02, 03
Function Code
It initializes it by data pattern of 1sct transfer by the
SCT Write data.
0101h
0102h
Repeat Write Pattern Foreground
Repeat Write data block Foreground
04 to 0B
LBA
(8 byte) Start LBA
C141-E280
5-77
Interface
Table 5.27 WRITE SAME (2/2)
Byte(hex)
0C to13
Name
Count
Value
Description
(8 byte) Number of Sectors
If the Function Code is 0001h, this field contains a
32-bit pattern that is written on the media.
14 to17
Pattern
(4 byte)
-
18 to 1FF
(Reserved)
Reserved
* It is invalid excluding the description value.
Table 5.28 ERROR RECOVERY CONTROL
Byte(hex)
00, 01
Name
Value
0003h
Description
Action Code
ERROR RECOVERY CONTROL
Set New Value
0001h
0002h
The retry processing when making an error in the
specified timer
Function
Code
02, 03
04, 05
Return Current Value
The timer value of the error recovery being set now is
displayed in SN /SC field.
0001h
0002h
Read Timer
Selection
Code
Write Timer
Set to Timer Value (x 100 ms)
Minimum value is 5 sec.
(ex.)
0000h: Disable timeout
06, 07
Value
(2 byte)
0031h: Invalid
0032h: 5000 ms (5 s)
08 to 1FF
(Reserved)
-
Reserved
* It is invalid excluding the description value.
5-78
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
Table 5.29 FEATURE CONTROL COMMAND
Byte(hex)
00, 01
Name
Value
0004h
Description
Action Code
FEATURE CONTROL COMMAND
Set New State
0001h
Return Current State
Function
Code
0002h
02, 03
04, 05
Current Feature Control State is displayed in SN/SC
field.
Return Option Flag
0003h
Current Option Flag is displayed in SN/SC field.
Write Cache
0001h
0002h
0003h
Feature Code
Write Reordering
Set time interval for temperature logging
Feature Code = 0001h (Set Write Cache)
0001h: Allow write cache operation to be determined
by ATA Set Feature command.
0002h: Force Write Cache enabled.
0003h: Force Write Cache disable.
Feature Code = 0002h(Set Write Reordering)
0001h: Enable Write Reordering
06, 07
New State
(2 byte)
0002h: Disable Write Reordering
Feature Code = 0003h(Set time interval)
0000h:
Invalid
0001h-FFFFh: Logging interval in minutes
(ex.) 0001h: Temperature data collection
interval is 1min.
000Fh: Temperature data collection
interval is 15min.
Bit 15-1: Reserved
Bit0: 1 =
Maintain the state at
08, 09
Option Flag
(Reserved)
(2 byte)
-
COMRESET/Power cycle.
Revert to default setting at
COMRESET/Power cycle.
0 =
0A to 1FF
Reserved
C141-E280
5-79
Interface
Table 5.30 SCT DATA TABLE
Byte(hex)
Name
Value
Description
00, 01
02, 03
Action Code
0005h
0001h
0000h
0001h
SCT DATA TABLE
Read Data Table
Invalid
Function Code
Reserved
HDA Temperature History Table
* See Table 5.31.
0002h
0003h
to
04, 05
Table ID
Reserved
CFFFh
D000h
to
FFFFh
Vender specific
Reserved
06 to 1FF
(Reserved)
-
5-80
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
Table 5.31 HDA Temperature
Byte(hex)
00, 01
Contents
Format Version
Sampling Period
02, 03
04, 05
Frequency of sampling each set time of temperature log.
Interval
Time of temperature log of interval (min)
Max Operation Limit (°C)
00
07
08
09
Over Limit (°C)
Min Operation Limit (°C)
Under Limit (°C)
0A to 1D Reserved
1E, 1F
20, 21
Number of logs that can be recorded in temperature log
Index of temperature log
Temperature log (478 data)
Entry 80h temperature log at Power cycle and default value is
80h.
022h: Temp Log No.0
023h: Temp Log No.1
to
22 to 1FF
1FFh: Temp Log No.478
C141-E280
5-81
Interface
•
SCT READ DATA (SN = E1h, FR = D5h)
This command reads the data specified with SCT SET COMMAND and number
of sectors specified Sector Count field.
28-bit command
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
0
x
1
x
1
0
0
0
0
DV
xx
Key (C2h)
Key (4Fh)
E1h
xx
D5h
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
DV
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
SCT READ DATA Command issue procedure.
1. Issue the SCT set command of action code 0005h.
2. Issue the SCT READ DATA command and receive the HDA temperature
data from the device.
5-82
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
•
SCT WRITE DATA (SN = E1h, FR = D6h)
This command writes the data of the number of sectors for which the data
specified with SCT SET COMMAND and number of sectors specified Sector
Count Field.
28-bit command
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
0
x
1
x
1
1
1
1
1
DV
xx
Key (C2h)
Key (4Fh)
E1h
xx
D6h
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
DV
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
SCT WRITE DATA Command issue procedure.
1. Issue the SCT set command of action code 0002h and function code 0002h.
2. Issue the SCT write command and the write data is transmitted to the device.
C141-E280
5-83
Interface
(17) DEVICE CONFIGURATION (X 'B1')
Individual Device Configuration Overlay feature sub commands are identified by
the value placed in the Features field. The following table shows these Features
field values. If this command sets with the reserved value of Features field, an
aborted command error is posted.
FR field
Command
C0h
C1h
DEVICE CONFIGURATION RESTORE
DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE
DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY
DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET
Reserved
C2h
C3h
00h to BFh,
C4h to FFh
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
0
x
1
x
1
x
0
0
0
1
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
C0h/C1h/C2h/C3h
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
5-84
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
•
DEVICE CONFIGURATION RESTORE (Features Field = C0h)
The DEVICE CONFIGURATION RESTORE command disables any setting
previously made by a DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET command and returns
the content of the IDENTIFY DEVICE command response to the original settings
as indicated by the data returned from the execution of a DEVICE
CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY command. After execution of this command, the
settings are kept regardless of the power-on or COMRESET execution.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The device is in the Device Configuration Freeze Lock state
(ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) The command was received before the DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET
command was issued (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(3) The SET MAX ADDRESS (EXT) command (F9h, 37h) has been specified
with a value in the Host Protected Area (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(4) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
•
DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE LOCK (Features Field = C1h)
The DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE LOCK command prevents accidental
modification of the Device Configuration Overlay settings. After successful
execution of a DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE LOCK command, all
DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET, DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE
LOCK, DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY, and DEVICE
CONFIGURATION RESTORE commands are aborted by the device. The
DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE LOCK condition is cleared by a power-
down, not cleared by a COMRESET or software reset.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The device is in the Device Configuration Freeze Lock state
(ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
C141-E280
5-85
Interface
•
DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY (Features Field = C2h)
The DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY command returns information
shown in Table 5.32. The content of this data structure indicates the selectable
commands, modes, and feature sets that the device is capable of supporting. If a
DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET command has been issued reducing the
capabilities, the response to an IDENTIFY DEVICE command will reflect the
reduced set of capabilities, however, the DEVICE CONFIGURATION
IDENTIFY command will not be changed.
•
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The device is in the Device Configuration Freeze Lock state
(ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET (Features Field = C3h)
The DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET command allows to reduce the set of
optional commands, modes, or feature sets supported by a device as indicated by a
DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY command. The format of the overlay
transmitted by the device is described in Table 5.32. As a result to the limitation
of the function by the DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET command, is reflected in
IDENTIFY information. When the bits in these words are cleared, the device no
longer supports the indicated command, mode, or feature set. If a bit is set in the
overlay transmitted by the device that is not set in the overlay received from a
DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY command, no action is taken for that
bit. After execution of this command, the settings are kept regardless of the
power-on, COMRESET, or soft reset.
If the restriction of Multiword DMA modes or Ultra DMA modes is executed, a SET
FEATURES command should be issued for the modes restriction prior the DEVICE
CONFIGURATION SET command is issued. When the Automatic Acoustic
Management function is assumed to be unsupported, Automatic Acoustic
Management is disabled beforehand by SET FEATURES command (FR=C2h).
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The device is in the Device Configuration Freeze Lock state
(ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) The SET MAX ADDRESS (EXT) command (F9h, 37h) has been specified
with a value in the Host Protected Area (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(3) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
(4) A DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET command has already modified the
original settings as reported by a DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY
command1 (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(5) Any of the bit modification restrictions described are violated
(ST=51h,ER=04h).
5-86
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
Table 5.32 DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY data structure (1/2)
Word
Value
Content
0
1
X '0002'
X '0007'
Data structure revision
Multiword DMA modes supported
Reflected in IDENTIFY information "WORD63".
Bits 15-3: Reserved
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
Bit 0:
1 = Multiword DMA mode 2 and below are supported
1 = Multiword DMA mode 1 and below are supported
1 = Multiword DMA mode 0 is supported
2
X '003F'
Ultra DMA modes supported
Reflected in IDENTIFY information "WORD88".
Bits 15-7: Reserved
Bit 6:
Bit 5:
Bit 4:
Bit 3:
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
Bit 0:
1 = Ultra DMA mode 6 and below are supported
1 = Ultra DMA mode 5 and below are supported
1 = Ultra DMA mode 4 and below are supported
1 = Ultra DMA mode 3 and below are supported
1 = Ultra DMA mode 2 and below are supported
1 = Ultra DMA mode 1 and below are supported
1 = Ultra DMA mode 0 is supported
3 to 6
7
-
Maximum LBA address Reflected in IDENTIFY information
"WORD60-61". (WORD100-103) *
X '79CF'
*
Command set/feature set supported
Reflected in IDENTIFY information "WORD82-87".
Bit 15:
Bit 14:
Bit 13:
Bit 12:
Bit 11:
Bit 10:
Bit 9:
Reserved
1 = Write Read Verify feature set supported
1 = SMART Conveyance self-test supported
1 = SMART Selective self-test supported
1 = FUA (Forced Unit Access) supported
Reserved
1 = Streaming feature set supported
1 = 48-bit Addressing feature set supported
1 = Host Protected Area feature set supported
1 = Automatic acoustic management supported
Bit 8:
Bit 7:
Bit 6:
Bit 5:
1 = READ/WRITE DMA QUEUED commands
supported
Bit 4:
Bit 3:
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
Bit 0:
1 = Power-up in Standby feature set supported
1 = Security feature set supported
1 = SMART error log supported
1 = SMART self-test supported
1 = SMART feature set supported
C141-E280
5-87
Interface
Table 5.32 DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY data structure (2/2)
Word
Value
Content
Serial-ATA command set/function
8
X '0015'
→ Reflected in IDENTIFY information "Word 76 to 79".
Bits 15-5: Reserved
Bit 4:
Bit 3:
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
1 = Software Settings Preservation supported
1 = Asynchronous Notification supported
1 = Interface power management supported
1 = Non-zero buffer offsets in DMA Setup FIS
supported
Bit 0:
1 = Native command queuing supported
9
10 to 20
21
X '0000'
X '0000'
X '2000'
Reserved for Serial-ATA
Reserved
Bits 15-14: Reserved
(X '2800' *1) Bit 13:
Bit 12:
Write uncorrectable is supported.
Reserved
Bit 11:
Freefall Control feature set is supported. *1
Bit 10-0: Reserved
Reserved
22 to 254
255
X '0000'
X 'xxA5'
Bits 15-8: Check sum code (This is obtained by calculating the
sum of all upper bytes and lower bytes in WORD 0 to
256 and the byte consisting of bits 7 to 0 in WORD
255, and then calculating the two's complement of the
lowest byte of that sum.)
Bits 7-0: 0xA5 (signature)
*1: Optional
5-88
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
(18) READ MULTIPLE (X 'C4')
The READ MULTIPLE command performs the same tasks as the READ
SECTOR(S) command except that this command sends the PIO Setup FIS before
sending data blocks of multiple sectors. The PIO Setup FIS is sent only before the
first data block is transferred, and it is not sent before any subsequent transfer of
sector blocks.
The number of sectors per block is defined by a successful SET MULTIPLE
MODE Command. The SET MULTIPLE MODE command should be executed
prior to the READ MULTIPLE command.
If the number of requested sectors is not divided evenly (having the same number
of sectors [block count]), as many full blocks as possible are transferred, then a
final partial block is transferred. The number of sectors in the partial block to be
transferred is n where n = remainder of ("number of sectors"/"block count").
If the READ MULTIPLE command is issued when the READ MULTIPLE
command is disabled, the device rejects the READ MULTIPLE command with an
ABORTED COMMAND error.
If an uncorrectable disk read error occurs, the read operation stops at the sector
where the error occurred (even if the read operation has not reached the end of the
block). At this time, the number of sectors that have not been transferred
(including the error sector), and either the cylinder, head, and sector addresses of
the error sector (CHS mode) or the logical block address of the error sector (LBA
mode) are set in the Shadow Block Register.
Figure 5.12 shows an example of the execution of the READ MULTIPLE
command.
•
Block count specified by SET MULTIPLE MODE command = 4 (number of
sectors in a block)
•
READ MULTIPLE command specifies;
Number of requested sectors = 9 (Sector Count register = 9)
C141-E280
5-89
Interface
Reg. HD
Host
Device
PIO Setup
Data
Block
Block
(4 sectors)
PIO Setup
Data
(4 sectors)
PIO Setup
Data (1sector)
Partial
Block
Figure 5.12 Execution example of READ MULTIPLE command
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A specified address exceeds the range where read operations are allowed
(ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(2) The range where read operations are allowed will be exceeded by an address
during a read operation (ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(3) An uncorrectable disk read error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 40h).
(4) The sync byte indicating the beginning of a sector was not found
(ST = 51h, ER = 01h).
(5) The READ MULTIPLE command is disabled (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(6) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 0Ch).
(7) An error other than the above errors occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
5-90
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
0
x
0
x
0
1
0
0
L
HD No. / LBA
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
Start sector No.
Transfer sector count
xx
/ LBA [LSB]
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
HD No. / LBA
x
L
x
x
End cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
End cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
End sector No.
/ LBA [LSB]
(*1)
Error information
*1 If the command is completed normally, the number of remaining
sectors is set in this field.
If the command is terminated because of an error, the number of
sectors for which data has not been transferred is set in the field.
C141-E280
5-91
Interface
(19) WRITE MULTIPLE (X 'C5')
The WRITE MULTIPLE command performs the same tasks as the WRITE
SECTOR(S) command except that this command sends the PIO Setup FIS before
sending data blocks of multiple sectors. The PIO Setup FIS is sent only before the
first data block is transferred, and it is not sent before any subsequent transfer of
sector blocks
.
The number of sectors per block is defined by a successful SET MULTIPLE
MODE command. The SET MULTIPLE MODE command should be executed
prior to the WRITE MULTIPLE command.
If the number of requested sectors is not divided evenly (having the same number
of sectors [block count]), as many full blocks as possible are transferred, then a
final partial block is transferred. The number of sectors in the partial block to be
transferred is n where n = remainder of ("number of sectors"/"block count").
If the WRITE MULTIPLE command is issued before the SET MULTIPLE
MODE command is executed or when WRITE MULTIPLE command is disabled,
the device rejects the WRITE MULTIPLE command with an ABORTED
COMMAND error.
A disk write error that occurs during execution of the WRITE MULTIPLE
command will be reported after a disk write operation has been attempted for the
transferred blocks and partial block. The write operation stops at the sector where
the error occurred (even if the write operation has not reached the end of the
block). At this time, the number of remaining sectors (the error sector and
subsequent sectors) and either cylinder, head, and sector addresses of the error
sector (CHS mode) or the logical block address of the error sector (LBA mode) are
set in the Shadow Block Register.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A specified address exceeds the range where write operations are allowed
(after a transfer of dummy data, ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(2) The range where write operations are allowed will be exceeded by an address
during a write operation (after a transfer of dummy data, ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(3) A write fault was detected when the write cache was disabled
(ST = 71h, ER = 10h).
(4) While the write cache is enabled, if the status indicating a completed transfer
(STS = 50h) is returned and a data write operation failed because a write fault
was detected during the data write operation, Abort will be returned for all
subsequent ATA commands (ST = 71h, ER = 04h). This state is cleared the
next time that the device is turned on.
(5) The WRITE MULTIPLE command is disabled (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(6) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
(7) An error other than the above errors occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
5-92
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
1
x
1
0
x
0
x
0
1
0
1
L
HD No. / LBA
CH
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
CL
SN
Start sector No.
Transfer sector count
xx
/ LBA [LSB]
SC
FR
(R: Retry)
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
HD No. / LBA
x
L
x
x
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
Start sector No.
/ LBA [LSB]
00 (*1)
Error information
*1 If the command was terminated because of an error, the number of
sectors for which data has not been written is set in this field.
C141-E280
5-93
Interface
(20) SET MULTIPLE MODE (X 'C6')
This command enables the device to perform the READ MULTIPLE and
WRITE MULTIPLE commands. The block count (number of sectors in a
block) for these commands is also specified by the SET MULTIPLE MODE
command.
The number of sectors per block is written into the Sector Count field. The IDD
supports block sizes of 1, 2, 4, 8, and 16 sectors.
Upon receipt of this command, the device checks the contents of the Sector Count
field. If the contents of the Sector Count field is valid and is a supported block
count, the value is stored for all subsequent READ MULTIPLE and WRITE
MULTIPLE commands. Execution of these commands is then enabled. If the
value of the Sector Count register is not a supported block count, an ABORTED
COMMAND error is posted and the READ MULTIPLE and WRITE MULTIPLE
commands are disabled.
If the contents of the Sector Count field are 0, when the SET MULTIPLE MODE
command is issued, the READ MULTIPLE and WRITE MULTIPLE commands
are disabled.
When the SET MULTIPLE MODE command operation is completed, the device
reports the status to the host.
In the default mode that is entered at power-on, the READ MULTIPLE and
WRITE MULTIPLE commands are enabled (block count = 10h).
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A value other than 00h, 01h, 02h, 04h, 08h, or 10h is specified in the SC field
(ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
x
0
x
0
x
0
1
1
0
xx
xx
xx
xx
Sector count/block
xx
5-94
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
Sector count/block
Error information
C141-E280
5-95
Interface
(21) READ DMA (X 'C8' or X 'C9')
The READ DMA command reads data from sectors, starting from the sectors
specified in the Device/Head, Cylinder High, Cylinder Low, and Sector Number
fields and continuing for as many sectors as specified in the Sector Count field. A
value ranging from 1 to 256 can be specified for the number of sectors. In order to
specify 256, "00" must be set in the Sector Count field. For the protocol
concerning data transfers, see Section 5.4.4.
When the command is completed, either cylinder, head, and sector addresses
(CHS mode) or the logical block address (LBA mode) of the last sector is stored in
the Shadow Block Register.
If an error such as an uncorrectable disk read error is detected during execution of
the READ DMA command and continued operation not possible, the data transfer
stops after all data, including the data of the sector where the error was detected, is
transferred. The device notifies the host of the status by sending the RegDH FIS.
At this time, the number of remaining sectors including the sector where the error
was detected, and either cylinder, head, and sector addresses (CHS mode) or the
logical block address (LBA mode) of the sector where the error was detected are
stored in the Shadow Block Register.
The host system can select the DMA transfer mode by using the SET FEATURES
command, however, the transfer speed does not change.
•
•
Multiword DMA transfer mode 0 to 2
Ultra DMA transfer mode 0 to 5
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A specified address exceeds the range where read operations are allowed
(ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(2) The range where read operations are allowed will be exceeded by an address
during a read operation (ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(3) An uncorrectable disk read error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 40h).
(4) The sync byte indicating the beginning of a sector was not found
(ST = 51h, ER = 01h).
(5) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 0Ch).
(6) A Host Buffer CRC error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 84h).
(7) An error other than the above errors occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
5-96
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
0
x
0
x
1
0
0
R
L
HD No. / LBA
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
Start sector No.
Transfer sector count
xx
/ LBA [LSB]
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
HD No. / LBA
x
L
x
x
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
Start sector No.
00 (*1)
Error information
/ LBA [LSB]
*1 If the command is terminated due to an error, the remaining
number of sectors of which data was not transferred is set in this
register.
C141-E280
5-97
Interface
(22) WRITE DMA (X 'CA' or X 'CB')
The WRITE DMA command writes data to sectors starting from the sectors
specified in the Device/Head, Cylinder High, Cylinder Low, and Sector Number
fields and continuing for as many sectors as specified in the Sector Count field. A
value ranging from 1 to 256 can be specified for the number of the sectors. In
order to specify 256, "00" must be set in the Sector Count Field. For the protocol
concerning data transfers, see Section 5.4.5.
When the command is completed, cylinder, head, and sector addresses (CHS
mode) of the last sector to which data was written are stored in the Shadow Block
Register.
If a disk write error is detected during execution of the WRITE DMA command
and continued operation is not possible, command processing is terminated after
all data, including the data of the sector where the error was detected, is
transferred. The device notifies the host of the status by sending the RegDH FIS.
At this time, the number of remaining sectors including the sector where the error
was detected, and either cylinder, head, and sector addresses (CHS mode) or the
logical block address (LBA mode) of the sector where the error was detected are
stored in the Shadow Block Register.
A host system can select the following transfer mode using the SET FEATURES
command, however, the transfer speed does not change.
•
•
Multiword DMA transfer mode 0 to 2
Ultra DMA transfer mode 0 to 5
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A specified address exceeds the range where write operations are allowed
(after a transfer of dummy data, ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(2) The range where write operations are allowed will be exceeded by an address
during a write operation (after a transfer of dummy data, ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(3) A write fault was detected when the write cache was disabled
(ST = 71h, ER = 10h).
(4) While the write cache is enabled, if the status indicating a completed transfer
(STS = 50h) is returned and a data write operation failed because a write fault
was detected during the data write operation, Abort will be returned for all
subsequent ATA commands (ST = 71h, ER = 04h). This state is cleared the
next time that the device is turned on.
(5) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 84h).
(6) An error other than the above errors occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
5-98
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
0
x
0
x
1
0
1
R
L
HD No. / LBA
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
Start sector No.
Transfer sector count
xx
/ LBA [LSB]
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
HD No. / LBA
x
L
x
x
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA
Start sector No.
00 (*1)
Error information
/ LBA [LSB]
*1 If the command was terminated because of an error, the number of
sectors for which data has not been written is set in this field.
C141-E280
5-99
Interface
(23) READ BUFFER (X 'E4')
The host system can read the current contents of the data buffer of the device by
issuing this command.
Upon receipt of this command, the device transfers the PIO Setup. After that, the
host system can read up to 512 bytes of data from the buffer.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 0Ch).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
x
1
x
0
x
0
1
0
0
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
Status information
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
5-100
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
(24) FLUSH CACHE (X 'E7')
This command is used to write every write cache data stored by the device into the
medium. When the device completes all the data writing, it reports the status to
the host system. The device performs every error recovery so that the data are
read correctly.
When executing this command, the writing of the data may take several seconds if
much data are to be written.
In case a non-recoverable disk write error has occurred while the data is being
read, the error generation address is put into the shadow block register before
ending the command. This error sector is deleted from the write cache data.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
x
1
x
0
x
0
1
1
1
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
C141-E280
5-101
Interface
(25) WRITE BUFFER (X 'E8')
The host system can overwrite the contents of the data buffer of the device with a
desired data pattern by issuing this command. Upon receipt of this command, the
device transfers the PIO Setup. After that, 512 bytes of data are transferred from
the host and the device writes the data to the buffer, then reports the status.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
x
1
x
0
x
1
0
0
0
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
5-102
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
(26) IDENTIFY DEVICE (X 'EC')
The host system issues the IDENTIFY DEVICE command to read parameter
information from the device. When it receives the command, the device prepares
the parameter information to be sent to the host. Next, the device sends the PIO
Setup FIS to the host, then sends the parameter information including a 512-byte
data. Table 5.33 shows the values of the parameter words and the meaning in the
buffer.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 0Ch).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
x
1
x
0
x
1
1
0
0
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
C141-E280
5-103
Interface
(27) IDENTIFY DEVICE DMA (X 'EE')
When this command is not used to transfer data to the host in DMA mode, this
command functions in the same way as the Identify Device command.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 84h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
x
1
x
0
x
1
1
1
0
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
5-104
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
Table 5.33 Information to be read by IDENTIFY DEVICE command (1/3)
Word
Value
Description
0
1
X '045A'
X '3FFF'
X 'C837'
X '0010'
X '0000'
X '003F'
X '0000'
General Configuration
Number of Logical cylinders
Detailed Configuration
Number of Logical Heads
Undefined
*1
*2
*3
*2
2
3
4-5
6
Number of Logical sectors per Logical track
Undefined
*2
7-9
10-19
20
Set by a device Serial number (ASCII code, 20 characters, right)
X '0003'
X 'xxxx'
X '0000'
–
Undefined
21
Buffer Size (1 LSB: 512 Bytes) ex. Buffer Size=8MBytes: X '4000'
Reserved
22
23-26
27-46
47
Firmware revision (ASCII code, 8 characters, left)
Set by a device Model name (ASCII code, 40 characters, left)
X '8010'
Maximum number of sectors per block on READ/WRITE
MULTIPLE command
48
49
X '0000'
X '2F00'
X '4000'
X '0200'
X '0200'
X '0007'
(Variable)
(Variable)
(Variable)
(Variable)
*8
Reserved
Capabilities
*4
*5
*6
50
Capabilities
51
PIO data transfer mode
Reserved
52
53
Enable/disable setting of words 54-58 and 64-70, 88
Number of current Cylinders
Number of current Head
Number of current sectors per track
Total number of current sectors
*7
54
55
56
57-58
59
Transfer sector count currently set by READ/WRITE
MULTIPLE command
*8
60-61
*2
Total number of user addressable sectors (28bit LBA mode only)
C141-E280
5-105
Interface
Table 5.33 Information to be read by IDENTIFY DEVICE command (2/3)
Word
Value
Description
62
63
64
65
66
67
X '0000'
X 'xx07'
X '0003'
X '0078'
X '0078'
X '0078'
Reserved
Multiword DMA transfer mode
*9
Advance PIO transfer mode support status
*10
Minimum multiword DMA transfer cycle time per word: 120 [ns]
Manufacturer's recommended DMA transfer cycle time: 120 [ns]
Minimum PIO transfer cycle time without IORDY flow
control: 120 [ns]
68
69-74
75
X '0078'
X '0000'
X '001F'
X '070x'
X '0000'
X '004C'
X '00xx'
X '01F8'
X '0042'
*16
Minimum PIO transfer cycle time with IORDY flow control: 120 [ns]
Reserved
Queue depth
*11
*12
76
Serial ATA capabilities
77
Reserved for Serial ATA
78
Support of Serial ATA function
Valid of Serial ATA function
Major version number: ATA8-ACS
Minor version number: ATA8-ACS Revision 3f
Support of command sets
*13
*14
*15
79
80
81
82
*16
*17
*18
*19
*20
*21
*22
*23
83
*17
Support of command sets
84
*18
Support of command sets/function
Valid of command sets/function
Valid of command sets/function
Default of command sets/function
Ultra DMA transfer mode
85
*19
86
*20
87
*21
88
X 'xx3F'
89
Set by a device Security Erase Unit execution time (1 LSB: 2 min.)
90
X '0000'
(Variable)
(Variable)
X '0000'
(Variable)
X '0000'
X 'xx'
Enhanced Security Erase Unit execution time (1 LSB: 2 min.)
91
Advance power management level
Master password revision
COMRESET Result
92
93
94
Acoustic Management level
Reserved
*24
95-99
100-103
Total number of sectors accessible by users in the 48-bit LBA mode *2
*25
5-106
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
Table 5.33 Information to be read by IDENTIFY DEVICE command (3/3)
Word
Value
Description
104-105
106
X '00'
*26
Reserved
Physical sector size per logical sector
Reserved
107
X '0000'
X 'xxxx'
108
15:12 NAA_ID(3:0) 05h
11:0 IEEE Company ID (23:12)
00h
0Eh
109
X 'xxxx'
15:4 IEEE Company ID (11:0)
3:0
Unique ID (35:32)
110
111
X 'xxxx'
X 'xxxx'
X '0000'
X '0000'
X '400x'
X '400x'
X '0000'
X '0xxx'
X 'xxxx'
X '0000'
X '003D'
X '0000'
X 'xxxx'
X 'xxxx'
X '0000'
X '00xx'
X '0000'
X '100F'
X '0021'
X '0000'
X '0001'
15:0 Unique ID (31:16)
15:0 Unique ID (15:0)
Reserved
112-116
117-118
119
Number of words for logical sectors
Features Implemented Word (Supported Settings)
Features Implemented Word (Enabled Settings)
Reserved
*27
*28
120
121-127
128
Security status
*29
*30
129-159
160-205
206
Undefined
Reserved
SCT Command sets supported
Reserved
207-209
210-211
212-213
214-219
220
Write Read Verify Sector Count Mode 3 Only
Write Read Verify Sector Count Mode 2 Only
Reserved
*31
*32
Write Read Verify Mode
Reserved
*33
221
222
Transport major version number
Transport minor version number
Reserved
223
224-233
234
Minimum number of 512 byte units per DOWNLOAD
MICROCODE command mode 3
*34
*35
235
X '0x00'
Maximum number of 512 byte units per DOWNLOAD
MICROCODE command mode3
236-242
243-254
255
X '0000'
X '0000'
X 'xxA5'
Reserved
Reserved
Check sum (The 2 complement of the lower order byte resulting from
summing bits 7 to 0 of word 0 to 254 and word 255, in byte units.)
C141-E280
5-107
Interface
*1 Word 0: General configuration
Bit 15:
ATA device = 0, ATAPI device = 1
Bits 14-8: Undefined
Bit 7:
Bit 6:
Removable disk drive = 0
Fixed drive = 1
Bits 5-3: Undefined
Bit 2:
IDENTIFY DEVICE Valid = 0
Bits 1-0: Reserved
*2 Word 1, 3, 6, 60-61,100-103
Word
MHZ2320BJ
X '3FFF'
X '10'
MHZ2250BJ
X '3FFF'
X '10'
MHZ2200BJ
X '3FFF'
X '10'
1
3
6
X '3F'
X '3F'
X '3F'
60-61
100-103
X 'FFFFFFF'
X 'FFFFFFF'
X 'FFFFFFF'
X '2542EAB0' X '1D1C5970' X '1749F1B0'
Word
MHZ2160BJ
X '3FFF'
X '10'
MHZ2120BJ
X '3FFF'
X '10'
MHZ2080BJ
X '3FFF'
1
3
X '10'
6
X '3F'
X '3F'
X '3F'
60-61
100-103
X 'FFFFFFF'
X 'DF94BB0'
X '950F8B0'
X '950F8B0'
X '12A19EB0' X 'DF94BB0'
*3 Status of the Word 2 Identify information is shown as follows:
37C8h
8C73h
C837h
Others
The device requires the SET FEATURES sub-command after the
power-on sequence in order to spin-up. The Identify information
is incomplete.
The device requires the SET FEATURES sub-command after the
power-on sequence in order to spin-up. The Identify information
is incomplete.
The device requires the SET FEATURES sub-command after the
power-on sequence in order to spin-up. The Identify information
is incomplete.
Reserved
5-108
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
*4 Word 49: Capabilities
Bits 15-14: Reserved
Bit 13:
Bit 12:
Bit 11:
Standby timer value. ATA spec is '1.'
Reserved
'1' = IORDY supported
Bit 10:
Bit 9:
Bit 8:
'1' = IORDY inhibition supported
'1' = DMA supported
'1' = LBA supported
Bits 7-0: Undefined
*5 Word 50: Device capability
Bit 15:
Bit 14:
0
1
Bit 13 to 1: Reserved
Bit 0:
Standby timer value '1' = Standby timer value of the device is the
smallest value.
*6 Word 51: PIO data transfer mode
Bits 15-8: PIO data transfer mode
Bits 7-0: Undefined
X '02' = PIO mode 2 supported
*7 Word 53: Enable/disable setting of word 54-58 and 64-70
Bits 15-3: Reserved
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
Bit 0:
'1' = Enable the word 88
'1' = Enable the word 64-70
'1' = Enable the word 54-58
*8 Word 59: Transfer sector count currently set by READ/WRITE
MULTIPLE command
Bits 15-9: Reserved
Bit 8:
'1' = Enable the multiple sector transfer
Bits 7-0: Transfer sector count currently set by READ/WRITE MULTIPLE
command without interrupt supports 1, 2, 4, 8 and 16 sectors.
C141-E280
5-109
Interface
*9 Word 63: Multiword DMA transfer mode
Bits 15-11: Reserved
Bit 10:
Bit 9:
Bit 8:
'1' = multiword DMA mode 2 is selected.
'1' = multiword DMA mode 1 is selected.
'1' = multiword DMA mode 0 is selected.
Bits 7-3: Reserved
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
Bit 0:
'1' = Multiword DMA mode 2, 1, and 0 supported (Bit 1 = 0 = '1')
'1' = Multiword DMA mode 1, and 0 supported (Bit 0 = '1')
'1' = Mode 0
*10 Word 64: Advance PIO transfer mode support status
Bits 15-8: Reserved
Bits 7-0: Advance PIO transfer mode
Bit 1:
Bit 0:
'1' = Mode 4 supported
'1' = Mode 3 supported
*11 WORD 75: X '001F' (0 to 31:32)
*12 WORD 76
Bits 15-11: Reserved
Bit 10:
Bit 9:
'1' = Supports the PHY event counter.
'1' = Supports the Power Management initiation request from
the host system.
Bit 8:
'1' = Supports the Native command queueing.
Bits 7-4: Reserved
Bit 3:
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
Bit 0:
Reserved for SATA
'1' = Supports the Gen-2 signaling speed (3.0Gbps)
'1' = Supports the Gen-1 signaling speed (1.5Gbps)
Reserved
5-110
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
*13 WORD 78
Bits 15-7: Reserved
Bit 6:
Bit 5:
Bit 4:
Bit 3:
'1' = Supports the software settings preservation.
Reserved
'1'= Supports the in-order data delivery.
'1'= Supports the Power Management initiation from the device to
the host system.
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
Bit 0:
'1' = Supports the DMA Setup FIS Auto-Activate optimization.
'1' = Supports the non-zero buffer offset in the DMA Setup FIS.
Reserved
*14 WORD 79
Bits 15-7: Reserved
Bit 6:
Bit 5:
Bit 4:
Bit 3:
Bit2
'1' = Enables the software settings preservation.
Reserved
'1' = Enables the in-order data delivery.
'1' = Enables the Power Management initiation function from
'1' = Enables the Auto-Activate optimization function in the DMA
Setup FIS.
Bit 1:
'1' = Enables the non-zero buffer offset function in the DMA
Setup FIS.
Bit 0:
Reserved
*15 WORD 80
Bits 15-9: Reserved
Bit 8:
Bit 7:
Bit 6:
Bit 5:
Bit 4:
Bit 3:
Bit 2:
'1' = ATA8-ACS supported
'1' = ATA/ATAPI-7 supported
'1' = ATA/ATAPI-6 supported
'1' = ATA/ATAPI-5 supported
'1' = ATA/ATAPI-4 supported
'1' = ATA-3 supported
'1' = ATA-2 supported
Bits 1-0: Undefined
C141-E280
5-111
Interface
*16 WORD 82
Bit 15:
Bit 14:
Bit 13:
Bit 12:
Bit 11:
Bit 10:
Bit 9:
Undefined
'1' = Supports the NOP command.
'1' = Supports the READ BUFFER command.
'1' = Supports the WRITE BUFFER command.
Undefined
'1' = Supports the Host Protected Area feature set.
'1' = Supports the DEVICE RESET command.
'1' = Supports the SERVICE interrupt.
'1' = Supports the release interrupt.
Bit 8:
Bit 7:
Bit 6:
'1' = Supports the read cache function.
'1' = Supports the write cache function.
'1' = Supports the PACKET command feature set.
'1' = Supports the power management feature set.
'1' = Supports the Removable Media feature set.
'1' = Supports the Security Mode feature set.
'1' = Supports the SMART feature set.
Bit 5:
Bit 4:
Bit 3:
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
Bit 0:
*17 WORD 83
Bit 15:
Bit 14:
Bit 13:
Bit 12:
Bit 11:
Bit 10:
Bit 9:
0
1
'1' = Supports the FLUSH CACHE EXT command.
'1' = Supports the FLUSH CACHE command.
'1' = Supports the Device Configuration Overlay feature set.
'1' = 48 bit LBA feature set.
'1' = Automatic Acoustic Management feature set.
'1' = Supports the SET MAX Security extending command.
Reserved
Bit 8:
Bit 7:
Bit 6:
'1' = When the power is turned on, spin is started by the SET
FEATURES sub-command.
Bit 5:
'1' = Supports the Power-Up In Standby set.
5-112
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
Bit 4:
'1' = Supports the Removable Media Status Notification feature
set.
Bit 3:
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
Bit 0:
'1' = Supports the Advanced Power Management feature set.
'1' = Supports the CFA (Compact Flash Association) feature set.
'1' = Supports the READ/WRITE DMA QUEUED command.
'1' = Supports the DOWNLOAD MICROCODE command.
*18 WORD 84
Bit 15:
0 The device always returns the fixed value indicated on the left.
1 The device always returns the fixed value indicated on the left.
'1' = Support the Unload Immediate command.
Bit 14:
Bit 13:
Bits 12-9: Reserved
Bit 8:
Bit 7:
Bit 6:
'1' = Support the World wide name.
'1' = Support the WRITE DMA QUEUED FUA EXT command.
'1' = Support the WRITE DMA FUA EXT and WRITE
MULTIPLE FUA EXT commands.
Bit 5:
'1' = Support the General Purpose Logging feature.
Reserved
Bits 4-2:
Bit 1:
'1' = Supports the SMART SELF-TEST.
'1' = Supports the SMART Error Logging.
Bit 0:
*19 WORD 85
Bit 15:
Bit 14:
Bit 13:
Bit 12:
Bit 11:
Bit 10:
Bit 9:
Undefined.
'1' = Supports the NOP command.
'1' = Supports the READ BUFFER command.
'1' = Supports the WRITE BUFFER command.
Undefined.
'1' = Host Protected Area function has been established.
'1' = Supports the DEVICE RESET command.
Bit 8:
'1' = Enables the SERVICE interrupt. From the SET
FEATURES command
Bit 7:
'1' = Enables the release interrupt. From the SET FEATURES
command
C141-E280
5-113
Interface
Bit 6:
'1' = Enables the read cache function. From the SET FEATURES
command
Bit 5:
Bit 4:
Bit 3:
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
Bit 0:
'1' = Enables the write cache function.
'1' = Enables the P PACKET command set.
'1' = Supports the Power Management function.
'1' = Supports the Removable Media function.
'1' = From the SECURITY SET PASSWORD command
'1' = From the SMART ENABLE OPERATION command
*20 WORD 86
Bit 15:
'1' = The values in WORD119-120 are valid.
Reserved
Bit 14:
Bits 13-10: Same definition as WORD 83.
Bit 9:
'1' = Enables the Automatic Acoustic Management function from
the SET FEATURES command
Bit 8:
'1' = From the SET MAX SET PASSWORD command
Bits 7-6: Same definition as WORD 83.
Bit 5:
Bit 4:
Bit 3:
'1' = Enables the Power-Up In Standby function.
'1' = Enables the Removable Media Status Notification function.
'1' = Enables the Advanced Power Management function.
Bits 2-0: Same definition as WORD 83.
*21 WORD 87
Bit 15:
Bit 14:
= 0 The device always returns the fixed value indicated on the left.
= 1 The device always returns the fixed value indicated on the left.
Bits 13-0: Same definition as WORD 84.
*22 WORD 88
Bit 15-8: Currently used Ultra DMA transfer mode
Bit 14:
Bit 13:
Bit 12:
Bit 11:
'1' = Mode 6 is selected.
'1' = Mode 5 is selected.
'1' = Mode 4 is selected.
'1' = Mode 3 is selected.
5-114
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
Bit 10:
Bit 9:
Bit 8:
'1' = Mode 2 is selected.
'1' = Mode 1 is selected.
'1' = Mode 0 is selected.
Bits 7-0: Supportable Ultra DMA transfer mode
Bit 6:
Bit 5:
Bit 4:
Bit 3:
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
Bit 0:
'1' = Supports the Mode 6
'1' = Supports the Mode 5
'1' = Supports the Mode 4
'1' = Supports the Mode 3
'1' = Supports the Mode 2
'1' = Supports the Mode 1
'1' = Supports the Mode 0
*23 WORD 89
Execution time of SECURITY ERASE UNIT command
Value
Time
0
Undefined
1-254
255
Display Value × 2 minutes
More than 508 minutes
*24 WORD 94
Bits 15-8: X 'FE' Recommended acoustic management value.
Bits 7-0: X 'XX' Current set value.
FE-C0: Performance mode
BF-80: Acoustic mode
00:
Acoustic management is unused it. (It is same as "FE-CO")
*25 WORD 100-103
Number of total sectors with accessible user in 48bit LBA command
C141-E280
5-115
Interface
*26 WORD 106
Bit 15:
0 The device always returns the fixed value indicated on the left.
1 The device always returns the fixed value indicated on the left.
'1' = Each device has several logical sectors per physical sector.
'1' = Logical sector of the device is greater than 256 Words.
Bit 14:
Bit 13:
Bit 12:
Bits 11-4: Reserved
Bits 3-0: Logical sector size per physical sector
*27 WORD 119
Bit 15:
Bit 14:
Bits 13-5: 0
0
1
Bit 4:
'1' = Segmented feature for DOWNLOAD MICROCODE is
supported
Bit 3:
'1' = READ and WRITE DMA EXT GPL optional commands are
supported
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
Bit 0:
'1' = WRITE UNCORRECTABLE EXT is supported.
'1' = Write-Read-Verify feature set is supported.
'1' = Clearing DRQ bit to zero when error bit is set is supported.
(No Dummy transferring function is supported.)
*28 WORD 120
Bit 15:
0
1
Bit 14:
Bits 13-5: 0
Bit 4:
'1' = Segmented feature for DOWNLOAD MICROCODE is
supported.
Bit 3:
'1' = READ and WRITE DMA EXT GPL optional commands are
supported.
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
Bit 0:
'1' = WRITE UNCORRECTABLE EXT is supported.
'1' = Write-Read-Verify feature set is enabled.
'1' = Clearing DRQ bit to zero when error bit is set is enabled.
The drive doesn't execute the dummy transferring.
5-116
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
*29 WORD 128
Bits 15-9: Reserved
Bit 8: Security level. 0: High, 1: Maximum
Bits 7-6: Reserved
Bit 5:
Bit 4:
Bit 3:
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
Bit 0:
'1' = Enhanced security erase supported
'1' = Security counter expired
'1' = Security frozen
'1' = Security locked
'1' = Security enabled
'1' = Security supported
*30 WORD 206: SCT Command Transport
Bits 15-6: Reserved
Bit 5:
Bit 4:
Bit 3:
Bit 2:
Bit 1:
Bit 0:
'1' = SCT Data Tables supported.
'1' = SCT Features Control supported.
'1' = SCT Error Recovery Control supported.
'1' = SCT Write Same supported.
'1' = SCT Long Sector Access supported.
'1' = SCT Command Transport supported
*31 WORD 210-211: Write Read Verify Sector Count Mode 3 Only.
The number of sectors to be verified
If Write Read Verify features set is enabled. (Mode 3)
Value:
400h – 40000h sectors
*32 WORD 212-213: Write Read Verify Sector Count Mode 2 Only.
The number of sectors to be verified
If Write Read Verify features set is enabled. (Mode 2)
Value:
10000h sectors
C141-E280
5-117
Interface
*33 WORD 220: Write Read Verify mode (Optional)
Verify mode display when Write Read Verify function is set by SET
FEATURES command.
Bits 15-8: Reserved
Bits 7-0: Verify mode display Value: 00h-03h
*34 WORD 234: Minimum number of 512Byte units per DOWNLOAD
MICROCODE command mode 3
When the command for which mode 3(FR reg = 03h) is specified with
DOWNLOAD MICROCODE (0x92) is issued, the host is a unit of possible
transfer of the minimum transfer sector.
Value:
0001h sector
*35 WORD 235: Maximum number of 512Byte units per DOWNLOAD
MICROCODE command mode3
When the command for which mode 3(FR reg = 03h) is specified with
DOWNLOAD
MICROCODE (0x92) is issued, the host is a unit of possible transfer of the
maximum transfer sector.
8MByte Buffer drive Value: 0B00h sector
5-118
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
(28) SET FEATURES (X 'EF')
The host system issues the SET FEATURES command to set parameters in the
Features field for the purpose of changing the device features to be executed.
Upon receipt of this command, the device sets the parameters in the Features field,
then reports the status to the host system.
If the value in the Features field is not supported or it is invalid, the device posts
an ABORTED COMMAND error.
Table 5.34 lists the available values and operational modes that may be set in the
Features field.
Table 5.34 Features field values and settable modes (1/2)
Features
Field
Drive operation mode
X '02'
X '03'
X '04'
X '05'
X '06'
X '07'
X '0B'
X '10'
X '33'
X '42'
X '54'
X '55'
Enables the write cache function.
Set the data transfer mode.
*1
*2
Enables the automatic reassign. (Note 1)
Enables the advanced power management function.
Enables the Power-Up In Standby function. (Note 1)
Spin up the Power-Up In Standby status device. (Note 1)
Enable Write-Read-Verify feature set (Optional)
Enables the Serial ATA function.
*5
*3
Undefined (Note 1)
Enables the Acoustic management function.
Undefined (Note 1)
*4
Disables the read cache function.
Clearing DRQ bit to zero when error bit is set is enabled.
The drive does not execute the dummy transferring. (Note 2)
X '5F'
X '66'
X '77'
X '81'
X '82'
X '84'
X '85'
X '86'
Disables the reverting to power-on default settings after software reset. (Note 1)
Undefined (Note 1)
Disables the 8-bit data transfer. (Note 1)
Disables the write cache function.
Enables the automatic shift. (Note 1)
Set the advanced power management mode to Mode-0.
Disables the Power-Up In Standby function. (Note 1)
C141-E280
5-119
Interface
Table 5.34 Features field values and settable modes (2/2)
Features
Drive operation mode
Field
X '88'
X '8B'
X '90'
X '99'
X 'AA'
Undefined (Note 1)
Disable Write-Read-Verify feature set.
Disables the Serial ATA function.
Undefined (Note 1)
*5
Enables the read cache function.
Specifies the transfer of 4-byte ECC for READ LONG and WRITE LONG
commands. (Note 1)
X 'BB'
X 'C2'
X 'CC'
Disables the Acoustic management function.
Enables the reverting to power-on default settings after software reset. (Note 1)
Clearing DRQ bit to zero when error bit is set is disabled.
The drive executes the dummy transferring. (Note 2)
X 'DF'
Note 1: Although there is a response to the command, nothing is done.
Note 2: Although there is a response to the command and this command reflects on Identify
Device information, DRQ bit is always cleared to zero when error is occurred in PIO
read command (This drive always doesn't the dummy transferring).
At power-on, the default mode is set as follows:
Write cache function:
Transfer mode:
Enabled
PIO Mode-4, Multiworld
DMA Mode-2
Advanced power management function:
Acoustic management function:
Read cache function:
Enabled (Mode-1)
State keeping
Enabled
At power-on or COMRESET, the default mode of Serial ATA function is set as
follows:
DMA Setup FIS Auto-Activate optimization:
Device-initiated interface power state Transitions: Disabled
Software Settings Preservation: Enabled
Disabled
5-120
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) An undefined code is specified in the FR or SC field (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block O registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
x
1
x
0
x
1
1
1
1
xx
xx
xx
xx or *5
xx or *1 to *5
[See Table 5.34]
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
E
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
C141-E280
5-121
Interface
*1) Data Transfer Mode
The host sets X '03' to the Features field. By issuing this command with setting a
value to the Sector Count Field, the transfer mode can be selected. Upper 5 bits of
the Sector Count register defines the transfer type and lower 3 bits specifies the
binary mode value.
The IDD supports following values in the Sector Count Field value. If other value
than below is specified, an ABORTED COMMAND error is posted.
Note: For a serial ATA device, the setting of a data transfer mode is reflected in
WORD 63 and 88 in Identify Device information. However, the actual
data transfer rate depends on the serial ATA signaling rate in WORD 76
in Identify Device information.
Transfer mode
Sector Count file
00000 000 (X '00')
•
PIO default transfer mode
PIO flow control transfer mode X
00001 000 (X '08': Mode 0)
00001 001 (X '09': Mode 1)
00001 010 (X '0A': Mode 2)
00001 011 (X '0B': Mode 3)
00001 100 (X '0C': Mode 4)
•
•
•
Single word DMA Mode X
00010 000 (X '10': Mode 0)
00010 001 (X '11': Mode 1)
00010 010 (X '12': Mode 2)
Multiword DMA transfer mode X
00100 000 (X '20': Mode 0)
00100 001 (X '21': Mode 1)
00100 010 (X '22': Mode 2)
01000 000 (X '40': Mode 0)
01000 001 (X '41': Mode 1)
01000 010 (X '42': Mode 2)
01000 011 (X '43': Mode 3)
01000 100 (X '44': Mode 4)
01000 101 (X '45': Mode 5)
•
Ultra DMA transfer mode X
5-122
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
*2) Advanced Power Management (APM)
The host writes the Sector Count field with the desired power management level
and executes this command with the Features field X '05', and then Advanced
Power Management is enabled.
The drive automatically shifts to power saving mode up to the specified APM level
when the drive does not receive any commands for a specific time. The sequence in
which the power management level shifts is from Active Idle to Low Power Idle to
Standby. The Mode-2 level requires the longest shifting time, depending on the APM
level settings. The settings of the APM level revert to their default values (Mode-1)
when power-on or COMRESET occurs for the drive.
APM Level
Sector Count Field
C0h-FEh
80h-BFh
01h-7Fh
00h, FFh
Mode 0 Active Idle → Low Power Idle
Mode 1 Active Idle → Low Power Idle
Mode 2 Active Idle → Low Power Idle → Standby
Reserve (State Keep)
Active Idle:
The spindle motor rotates, and the head is loaded on
the most inner position on media.
Low Power Idle: The spindle motor rotates, and the head is unloaded.
Standby: The spindle motor stops, and the head is unloaded.
C141-E280
5-123
Interface
*3) Serial ATA Functions
The host can enable and disable the following Serial ATA functions by issuing
this command after setting X '10/90' in the Features field and an applicable value
in the Sector Count field:
Serial ATA function
Sector Count field
Non-zero buffer offset in DMA Setup FIS
DMA Setup FIS Auto-Activate optimization
Device-initiated interface power state Transitions
Guaranteed In-Order Data Delivery
Asynchronous Notification
01h (*1)
02h (*2)
03h (*3)
04h (*1)
05h (*1)
06h (*4)
Software Settings Preservation
*1 The device normally responds to the command but performs no
operation.
*2 This feature is disabled when power is on. While this function is
enabled, the device does not return the DMA Activate FIS for the first
data sector after the WRITE FP DMA QUEUED command is issued.
*3 This feature is disabled when power is on. While this function is
enabled, the device perform interface power save.
*4: This feature is enabled when power is on. While this function is enabled,
the device preserves the software settings across COMRESET.
5-124
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
*4) Automatic Acoustic Management (AAM)
The host writes to the Sector Count filed with the requested acoustic management
level and executes this command with subcommand code 42h, and then Automatic
Acoustic Management is enabled. The AAM level setting is preserved by the
drive across power on and COMRESET.
AAM Level
Sector Count Filed
Performance mode (Fast Seek)
Acoustic mode (Slow Seek)
Abort
C0h-FEh
80h-BFh
01h-7Fh
00h, FFh
Non Operate
High-speed seek to which gives priority to the performance operates as for
"Performance mode", and low-speed seek by which the seek sound is suppressed
operates as for "Acoustic mode".
Setting the seek mode by this command is applied to the seek operation in all
command processing.
*5) Write-Read-Verify feature (optional)
SN
SC
Description
00h (Mode 0)
01h (Mode 1)
-
-
Enabled Always
The first 65,536 logical sectors written by the host
after every spin-up (or reset) or after issuing this
set features shall be verified.
02h (Mode 2)
03h (Mode 3)
-
Device may determine, for itself, how many logical
sectors to do.
Verify count
The first (Verify Sector Count x 1024) logical
sectors written by the host after every spin-up or
after issuing this set features shall be verified.
04h-FFh
-
Reserved (Abort)
C141-E280
5-125
Interface
(29) SECURITY SET PASSWORD (X 'F1')
This command enables a user password or master password to be set.
The host transfers the 512-byte data shown in Table 5.35 to the device. The device
determines the operation of the lock function according to the specifications of the
Identifier bit and Security level bit in the transferred data. (Table 5.36)
Issuing this command in LOCKED MODE or FROZEN MODE returns the
Aborted Command error.
Table 5.35 Contents of SECURITY SET PASSWORD data
Word
0
Contents
Control word
Bit 0 Identifier
0 = Sets a user password.
1 = Sets a master password.
Bits 1 to 7 Reserved
Bit 8 Security level
0 = High
1 = Maximum
Bits 9 to 15 Reserved
Password (32 bytes)
1 to 16
17
Master password version number
(This value is valid only when Word 0 Bit 0
is set to one.)
18 to 255 Reserved
Table 5.36 Relationship between combination of Identifier and Security level,
and operation of the lock function
Identifier
User
Level
High
Description
The specified password is set as a new user password. The
lock function is enabled after the device is turned off and
then on. LOCKED MODE can be canceled using the user
password or the master password already set.
Master
User
High
The specified password is set as a new master password.
The lock function is not enabled.
Maximum The specified password is set as a new user password. The
lock function is enabled after the device is turned off and
then on. LOCKED MODE can be canceled using the user
password only. The master password already set cannot
cancel LOCKED MODE.
Master
Maximum The specified password is set as a new master password.
The lock function is not enabled.
5-126
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The device is in Security Locked mode (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) The device is in Security Frozen mode (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(3) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
x
0
0
0
1
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Register contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
C141-E280
5-127
Interface
(30) SECURITY UNLOCK (X 'F2')
This command cancels LOCKED MODE.
The host transfers the 512-byte data shown in Table 5.37 to the device. Operation
of the device varies as follows depending on whether the host specifies the master
password.
•
•
When the master password is selected
When the security level is LOCKED MODE is high, the password is compared
with the master password already set. If the passwords are the same, LOCKED
MODE is canceled. Otherwise, the Aborted Command error is returned. If the
security level in LOCKED MODE is set to the maximum level, the Aborted
Command error is always returned.
When the user password is selected
The password is compared with the user password already set. If the passwords
are the same, LOCKED MODE is canceled. Otherwise, the Aborted Command
error is returned.
If the password comparison fails, the device decrements the UNLOCK counter.
The UNLOCK counter initially has a value of five. When the value of the
UNLOCK counter reaches zero, this command or the SECURITY ERASE UNIT
command causes the Aborted Command error until the device is turned off and
then on. Issuing this command with LOCKED MODE canceled (in UNLOCK
MODE) has no affect on the UNLOCK counter.
Table 5.37 Contents of security password
Word
0
Contents
Control word
Bit 0: Identifier
0 = Compares the user passwords.
1 = Compares the master passwords.
Bits 1 to 15: Reserved
Password (32 bytes)
1 to 16
17 to 255 Reserved
5-128
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) An incorrect password is specified (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) The device is in Security Frozen mode (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(3) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
x
0
0
1
0
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Register contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
C141-E280
5-129
Interface
(31) SECURITY ERASE PREPARE (X 'F3')
The SECURITY ERASE UNIT command feature is enabled by issuing the
SECURITY ERASE PREPARE command and then the SECURITY ERASE
UNIT command. The SECURITY ERASE PREPARE command prevents data
from being erased unnecessarily by the SECURITY ERASE UNIT command.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The device is in Security Frozen mode (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
x
0
0
1
1
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
5-130
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
(32) SECURITY ERASE UNIT (X 'F4')
This command erases all user data. This command also invalidates the user
password and releases the lock function.
The host transfers the 512-byte data shown in Table 5.38 to the device. The device
compares the user password or master password in the transferred data with the user
password or master password already set. The device erases user data, invalidates
the user password, and releases the lock function if the passwords are the same.
Although this command invalidates the user password, the master password is
retained.
To recover the master password, issue the SECURITY SET PASSWORD
command and reset the user password.
Table 5.38 Contents of Security Erase Unit Password
Word
0
Contents
Control Word
Bit 0: Identifier
0 = Compares the user passwords
1 = Compares the master passwords
Bit 1: Erase mode
0 = Normal Erase
1 = Quick Erase
Bit 2 to 15: Reserved
Password (32 bytes)
1 to 16
17 to 255
Reserved
C141-E280
5-131
Interface
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) An incorrect password is specified (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) The Security Erase Prepare command did not complete normally beforehand
(ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(3) The device is in Security Frozen mode (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(4) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
x
0
1
0
0
xx
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
Status information
DH
x
x
x
x
xx
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
5-132
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
(33) SECURITY FREEZE LOCK (X 'F5')
This command puts the device into FROZEN MODE. The following commands
used to change the lock function return the Aborted Command error if the device
is in FROZEN MODE.
•
•
•
•
•
SECURITY SET PASSWORD
SECURITY UNLOCK
SECURITY DISABLE PASSWORD
SECURITY ERASE PREPARE
SECURITY ERASE UNIT
FROZEN MODE is canceled when the power is turned off.
If this command is reissued in FROZEN MODE, the command is completed and
FROZEN MODE remains unchanged.
The following medium access commands return the Aborted Command error
when the device is in LOCKED MODE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
READ DMA (EXT)
READ MULTIPLE (EXT)
READ SECTORS (EXT)
READ VERIFY SECTORS (EXT)
WRITE DMA (EXT)
WRITE MULTIPLE (EXT)
WRITE SECTORS (EXT)
WRITE VERIFY
SECURITY DISABLE PASSWORD
SECURITY FREEZE LOCK
SECURITY SET PASSWORD
SET MAX ADDRESS (EXT)
FLUSH CACHE (EXT)
DEVICE CONFIGURATION RESTORE
DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET
DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE LOCK
C141-E280
5-133
Interface
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY
READ LOG EXT
WRITE DMA FUA EXT
WRITE LOG EXT
WRITE UNCORRECTABLE EXT
READ LOG DMA EXT
WRITE LOG DMA EXT
READ FP DMA QUEUED
WRITE FP DMA QUEUED
WRITE MULTIPLE FUA EXT
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The device is in Security Locked mode (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
x
0
1
0
1
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
5-134
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
(34) SECURITY DISABLE PASSWORD (X 'F6')
This command invalidates the user password already set and releases the lock
function.
The host transfers the 512-byte data shown in Table 5.37 to the device. The
device compares the user password or master password in the transferred data with
the user password or master password already set, and releases the lock function if
the passwords are the same.
Although this command invalidates the user password, the master password is
retained. To recover the master password, issue the SECURITY SET
PASSWORD command and reset the user password.
If the user password or master password transferred from the host does not match,
the Aborted Command error is returned.
Issuing this command while in LOCKED MODE or FROZEN MODE returns the
Aborted Command error.
(The section about the SECURITY FREEZE LOCK command describes
LOCKED MODE and FROZEN MODE.)
C141-E280
5-135
Interface
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) An incorrect password is specified (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) The device is in Security Locked mode (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(3) The device is in Security Frozen mode (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(4) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
x
0
1
1
0
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
5-136
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
(35) READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS (X 'F8')
This command posts the maximum address intrinsic to the device, which can be
set by the SET MAX ADDRESS command. Upon receipt of this command, the
device indicates the maximum address in the DH, CH, CL and SN field. Then
reports the status to the host system.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
1
x
1
x
1
0
0
0
L
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
Max head/LBA [MSB]
x
x
x
x
CYL No. [MSB] / LBA
CYL No. [LSB] / LBA
SCT No.
/ LBA[LSB]
xx
Error information
C141-E280
5-137
Interface
(36) SET MAX (X 'F9')
SET MAX Features Register Values
Value
00h
Command
Obsolete
01h
SET MAX SET PASSWORD
SET MAX LOCK
02h
03h
SET MAX UNLOCK
SET MAX FREEZE LOCK
Reserved
04h
05h - FFh
•
SET MAX ADDRESS
A successful READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS command shall immediately
precede a SET MAX ADDRESS command.
This command allows the maximum address accessible by the user to be set in LBA
or CHS mode. Upon receipt of the command, the device saves the maximum
address specified in the DH, CH, CL and SN field then, reports the status to the host.
The new address information set by this command is reflected in Words 1, 54, 57,
58, 60 and 61(100 to 103) of IDENTIFY DEVICE information. If an attempt is
made to perform a read or write operation for an address beyond the new address
space, an ID Not Found error will result.
When SC field bit 0, VV (Value Volatile), is 1, the value set by this command is
held even after power on. When the VV bit is 0, the value set by this command
becomes invalid when the power is turned on, and the maximum address returns to
the value most lately set when VV bit = 1. (When the command with VV=1 has
not issued before, the maximum address returns to the default value.)
When the READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS command has been issued
immediately preceding this command, this command operates normally as the
SET MAX ADDRESS command. Otherwise, this command operates as one of
the SET MAX subcommands depending on the value in the Features field. The
subcommands are explained below.
After power on, the host can issue this command only once when VV bit = 1. If this
command with VV bit = 1 is issued twice or more, any command following the first
time will result in an ID Not Found error.
When the SET MAX ADDRESS EXT command is executed, SET MAX
ADDRESS command is aborted. The address value returns to the origin when the
SET MAX ADDRESS EXT command is executed using the address value
returned by the READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS EXT command.
5-138
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The command has been issued more than twice (ST = 51h, ER = 10h).
(2) The READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS command has not been issued prior to
the SET MAX ADDRESS command (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(3) The SET MAX ADDRESS (EXT) command has been issued
(ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(4) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
1
x
1
x
1
0
0
1
L
HD No./LBA
CYL No. [MSB] / LBA
CYL No. [LSB] / LBA
SCT No.
/ LBA[LSB]
xx
xx
VV
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
Status information
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
x
x
x
x
xx
CYL No. [MSB] / LBA
CYL No. [LSB] / LBA
SCT No.
/ LBA[LSB]
xx
Error information
•
SET MAX SET PASSWORD (Features Field = 01h)
This command requests a transfer of 1 sector of data from the host, and defines the
contents of SET MAX password. The password is retained by the device until the
next power cycle.
C141-E280
5-139
Interface
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The device is in Set Max Locked mode or Set Max Freeze Locked mode
(ST = 51h, ER =04h).
(2) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
0
0
1
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
01
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
Password information
Words
Contents
0
Reserved
1 to 16
17 to 255
Password (32 bytes)
Reserved
5-140
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
•
SET MAX LOCK (Features Field = 02h)
The SET MAX LOCK command sets the device into SET_MAX_LOCK state.
After this command is completed, any other SET MAX commands except SET
MAX UNLOCK and SET MAX FREEZE LOCK commands are rejected. And
the device returns command aborted.
The device remains in the SET MAX LOCK state until a power cycle or the
acceptance of SET MAX UNLOCK or SET MAX FREEZE LOCK command.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The device is in Set Max Locked mode or Set Max Freeze Locked mode
(ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
0
0
1
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
02
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
C141-E280
5-141
Interface
•
SET MAX UNLOCK (Features Field = 03h)
This command requests a transfer of single sector of data from the host, and
defines the contents of SET MAX ADDRESS password.
The password supplied in the sector of data transferred shall be compared with the
stored password.
If the password compare fails, the device returns command aborted and
decrements the Unlock counter, and remains in the Set Max Lock state. On the
acceptance of the SET MAX LOCK command, the Unlock counter is set to a
value of five. When this counter reaches zero, then SET MAX UNLOCK
command returns command aborted until a power cycle.
If the password compare matches, then the device makes a transition to the Set
Max Unlocked state and all SET MAX commands will be accepted.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The device is in Set Max Locked mode or Set Max Freeze Locked mode
(ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) The device is in Set Max Unlocked mode (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(3) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
0
0
1
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
03
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
5-142
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
•
SET MAX FREEZE LOCK (Features Field = 04h)
The Set MAX FREEZE LOCK command sets the device to SET_MAX_Frozen
state.
After the device made a transition to the Set Max Freeze Lock state, the following
SET MAX commands are rejected, then the device returns command aborted:
−
−
−
−
−
SET MAX ADDRESS
SET MAX SET PASSWORD
SET MAX LOCK
SET MAX UNLOCK
SET MAX FREEZE LOCK
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The device is in Set Max Locked mode or Set Max Freeze Locked mode
(ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
FR
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
0
0
1
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
04
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
CH
CL
SN
SC
ER
Status information
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
Error information
C141-E280
5-143
Interface
(37) READ SECTOR(S) EXT (X '24')
•
Description
This command is the extended command of the READ SECTOR (S) command.
The LBA specification is increased from 28 bits to 48 bits, and the maximum
number of sectors that can be transferred by a single command is changed from
100h to 10000h. Other command controls are the same as those of the READ
SECTOR (S) command.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The command was issued in CHS mode (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
The other error reporting conditions are the same as those of the READ
SECTOR(S) command.
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
1
0
1
1
0
x
0
1
0
0
L
xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
Sector count (15-8)
Sector count (7-0)
FR EXP
FR
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
Status information
x
DH
1
L
1
xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
xx
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
xx
ER
Error information
5-144
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
(38) READ DMA EXT (X '25')
•
Description
This command is the extended command of the READ DMA command. The
LBA specification is increased from 28 bits to 48 bits, and the maximum
number of sectors that can be transferred by a single command is changed
from 100h to 10000h. Other command controls are the same as those of the
READ DMA command.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The command was issued in CHS mode (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
The other error reporting conditions are the same as those of the READ DAM
command.
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
1
0
1
1
0
x
0
1
0
1
L
xx
CH EXP
CH
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
SC EXP
SC
Sector count (15-8)
Sector count (7-0)
FR EXP
FR
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
Status information
x
DH
1
L
1
xx
CH EXP
CH
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
xx
xx
ER
Error information
C141-E280
5-145
Interface
(39) READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS EXT (X '27')
•
Description
This command is used to assign the highest address that the device can initially set
with the SET MAX ADDRESS EXT command. The maximum address is
displayed in the CH(EXP), CL(EXP), SN(EXP) filed of the device shadow block
registers.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) This command is issued with LBA = 0. (ST = 51h, ER= 04h)
(2) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
1
0
1
1
0
x
0
1
1
1
L
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
FR EXP
FR
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
x
1
L
1
xx
CH EXP
CH
Native max address LBA (47-40)
Native max address LBA (23-16)
Native max address LBA (39-32)
Native max address LBA (15-8)
Native max address LBA (31-24)
Native max address LBA (7-0)
xx
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
xx
ER
Error information
5-146
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
(40) READ MULTIPLE EXT (X '29')
•
Description
This command is the extended command of the READ MULTIPLE command.
The LBA specification is increased from 28 bits to 48 bits, and the maximum
number of sectors that can be transferred by a single command is changed from
100h to 10000h. Other command controls are the same as those of the READ
MULTIPLE command.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The command was issued in CHS mode (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
The other error reporting conditions are the same as those of the READ
MULTIPLE command.
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
1
0
1
1
0
x
1
0
0
1
L
xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
Sector count (15-8)
Sector count (7-0)
FR EXP
FR
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
x
1
L
1
xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
xx
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
xx
ER
Error information
C141-E280
5-147
Interface
(41) READ LOG EXT (X '2F')
The READ LOG EXTEND command reads versatile log data. Versatile log data
includes the Extended SMART Comprehensive Error log, the Extended SMART
Self-test log, and the SMART Selective log. The effectiveness of the log types
depends on customization. For the protocol concerning data transfers, see Section
5.4.
The number of the log to be read is specified as the Log address. For log data
consisting of multiple sectors, a sector offset can be specified as an instruction so
that data transfer starts from the specified sector. The number of sectors to be
transferred is specified as the Sector count.
If an error occurs in the FP Queued protocol, Read Log Ext log page 10h
containing the error information is transferred. This Read Log Ext log page can be
read by specifying Sector offset = 00h, Sector count = 01h, and Log address =
10h. For the data format of Read Log Ext log page 10h, see Table 5.39.
The events of the PHY level on an interface are collected and it registers with
Read Log Extend page 11h. This Read Log Ext log page can be read by specifying
Sector offset = 00h, Sector count = 01h, and Log address = 11h. For the data
format of Read Log Ext log page 11h, see Table 5.41.
If this command is not supported, or if an invalid value is specified for the Log
address, Sector count, or Sector offset, the Aborted Command error occurs.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) An error was detected during power-on processing (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) An error was detected during wake-up processing (in cases where wake-up
processing is required before execution of this command)
(ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(3) An error that cannot be corrected with ECC occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 40h).
(4) The sync byte indicating the beginning of a sector was not found
(ST = 51h, ER = 01h).
(5) An invalid log sector address or invalid Sector count (number of sectors to be
transferred) is specified (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(6) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 0Ch).
5-148
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
x
0
x
1
x
0
x
1
1
1
1
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
Sector offset (15-8)
Sector offset (7-0)
xx
SN EXP
SN
Log address
Sector count (15-8)
Sector count (7-0)
xx
SC EXP
SC
FR EXP
FR
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
xx
xx
SN EXP
SN
xx
xx
SC EXP
SC
xx
xx
ER
Error information
C141-E280
5-149
Interface
Table 5.39 Data format of Read Log Ext log page 10h
Byte(hex) Item
00
01
Tag field
Reserved
02
Status field value
Error field value
03
04
Sector Number field value
Cylinder Low field value
Cylinder High field value
Dev/Head field value
05
06
07
08
Sector Number Exp field value
Cylinder Low Exp field value
Cylinder High Exp field value
Reserved
09
0A
0B
0C
Sector Count field value
Sector Count Exp field value
Reserved
0D
0E to FF
100 to 1FE Vendor Unique
1FF
Check sum
Table 5.40 Tag field information
Bit
Description
0 to 4
5, 6
7
If bit 7 is 0, this field has an error tag number.
Reserved
If this bit is 0, the field consisting of bits 0 to 4 has an
error tag number.
5-150
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
Table 5.41 Data format of Read Log Ext log page 11h
Byte(hex)
Item
00 to 03
04 to 05
06 to 09
0A to 0B
0C to 0F
...
Reserved
Counter 1 Identifier
Counter 1 Value
Counter 2 Identifier
Counter 2 Value
...
4C to 4D
4E to 51
52 to 53
Counter 10 Identifier
Counter 10 Value
Counter 0 Identifier
54 to 1FE Reserved
1FF Check sum
Table 5.42 Counter Identifier information
Identifier
Description
0
1
No counter value : marks end of counters in the page
Command failed due to an ICRC error
2
Data FIS R_ERR ending status (transmitted and received)
Data FIS R_ERR ending status (transmitted)
3
4
Data FIS R_ERR ending status (received)
5
Non-data FIS R_ERR ending status (transmitted and received)
Non-data FIS R_ERR ending status (transmitted)
Non-data FIS retries (transmitted)
6
8
9
Transitions from drive PhyRdy to drive PhyNRdy.
Signature Device to Host Register FIS sent due to a COMRESET.
CRC errors within the FIS (received)
A
B
D
F
10
Non-CRC errors within the FIS (received)
Data FIS R_ERR ending status due to CRC errors (received)
Data FIS R_ERR ending status due to non-CRC errors (received)
C141-E280
5-151
Interface
•
SCT STATUS REQUEST (SN = E0h)
Refer to SMART Command Transport (SCT).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting)
CM
DH
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
L
DV
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
00h
00h
xx
SN EXP
SN
E0h
00h
01h
xx
SC EXP
SC
FR EXP
FR
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
x
x
x
DV
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
xx
xx
SN EXP
SN
xx
xx
SC EXP
SC
xx
xx
ER
Error information
5-152
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
•
SCT READ DATA (SN = E1h, FR = D5)
Refer to SMART Command Transport (SCT).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting)
CM
DH
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
L
DV
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
00h
00h
xx
SN EXP
SN
E1h
xx
SC EXP
SC
xx
FR EXP
FR
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
x
x
x
DV
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
xx
xx
SN EXP
SN
xx
xx
SC EXP
SC
xx
xx
ER
Error information
C141-E280
5-153
Interface
(42) WRITE SECTOR(S) EXT (X '34')
•
Description
This command is the extended command of the WRITE SECTOR (S) command.
The LBA specification is increased from 28 bits to 48 bits, and the maximum
number of sectors that can be transferred by a single command is changed from
100h to 10000h. Other command controls are the same as those of the WRITE
SECTOR (S) command.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The command was issued in CHS mode (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
The other error reporting conditions are the same as those of the WRITE
SECTOR(S) command.
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
1
0
1
1
1
x
0
1
0
0
L
xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
Sector count (15-8)
Sector count (7-0)
FR EXP
FR
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
x
1
L
1
xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
xx
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
xx
ER
Error information
5-154
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
(43) WRITE DMA EXT (X '35')
•
Description
This command is the extended command of the WRITE DMA command. The
LBA specification is increased from 28 bits to 48 bits, and the maximum number
of sectors that can be transferred by a single command is changed from 100h to
10000h. Other command controls are the same as those of the WRITE DMA
command.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The command was issued in CHS mode (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
The other error reporting conditions are the same as those of the WRITE
DMA command.
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
1
0
1
1
1
x
0
1
0
1
L
xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
Sector count (15-8)
Sector count (7-0)
FR EXP
FR
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
x
1
L
1
xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
xx
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
xx
ER
Error information
C141-E280
5-155
Interface
(44) SET MAX ADDRESS EXT (X '37')
•
Description
This command limits specifications so that the highest address that can be
accessed by users can be specified only in LBA mode.
The address information specified with this command is set in words 1, 54, 57, 58,
60, 61, and 100 to 103 of the IDENTIFY DEVICE command response. If read or
write processing is executed for an address that is outside of the new address
space, an ID Not Found error occurs.
When SC field bit 0, VV (Value Volatile), is 1, the value set by this command is
held even after power on or COMRESET. When the VV bit is 0, the value set by
this command becomes invalid when the power is turned on, and the maximum
address returns to the value most lately set when VV bit = 1. (When the command
with VV=1 has not issued before, the maximum address returns to the default
value.)
After power on, the host can issue this command only once when VV bit = 1. If this
command with VV bit = 1 is issued twice or more, any command following the first
time will result in an ID Not Found error.
When the SET MAX ADDRESS command is executed, SET MAX ADDRESS
EXT command is aborted. The address value returns to the origin when the SET
MAX ADDRESS command is executed using the address value returned by the
READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS command.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) This command is issued twice or more in an operation sequence.
(ST = 51h, ER = 10h)
(2) The READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS EXT command (27h) is not issued
immediately before this command (ST = 51h, ER = 04h) is issued.
(3) This command is issued in CHS mode (ST = 51h, ER = 04h)
(4) The SET MAX ADDRESS command has already been issued.
(ST = 51h, ER = 04h)
(5) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
5-156
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
1
0
1
1
1
x
0
1
1
1
L
xx
CH EXP
CH
SET MAX LBA (47-40)
SET MAX LBA (23-16)
CL EXP
CL
SET MAX LBA (39-32)
SET MAX LBA (15-8)
SN EXP
SN
SET MAX LBA (31-24)
SET MAX LBA (7-0)
SC EXP
SC
xx
xx
VV
FR EXP
FR
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
x
1
L
1
xx
CH EXP
CH
SET MAX LBA (47-40)
SET MAX LBA (23-16)
SET MAX LBA (39-32)
SET MAX LBA (15-8)
SET MAX LBA (31-24)
SET MAX LBA (7-0)
xx
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
xx
ER
Error information
C141-E280
5-157
Interface
(45) WRITE MULTIPLE EXT (X '39')
•
Description
This command is the extended command of the WRITE MULTIPLE command.
The LBA specification is increased from 28 bits to 48 bits, and the maximum
number of sectors that can be transferred by a single command is changed from
100h to 10000h. Other command controls are the same as those of the WRITE
MULTIPLE command.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The command was issued in CHS mode (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
The other error reporting conditions are the same as those of the WRITE
MULTIPLE command.
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
1
0
1
1
1
x
1
0
0
1
L
xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
Sector count (15-8)
Sector count (7-0)
FR EXP
FR
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
Status information
DH
CH EXP
CH
1
L
1
x
xx
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
xx
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
xx
ER
Error information
5-158
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
(46) WRITE DMA FUA EXT (X '3D')
•
Description
The WRITE DMA FUA EXT command reports the status of a command after user
data is written to a medium, regardless of whether the write cache feature is
enabled or disabled. The other command control and error reporting conditions
are the same as those of the WRITE DMA EXT command.
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
1
0
1
1
1
x
1
1
0
1
L
xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
Sector count (15-8)
Sector count (7-0)
FR EXP
FR
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
x
1
L
1
xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
xx
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
xx
ER
Error information
C141-E280
5-159
Interface
(47) WRITE LOG EXT (X '3F')
The WRITE LOG EXTEND command writes versatile log data. Versatile log
data includes the Extended SMART Comprehensive Error log, the Extended
SMART Self-test log, and the SMART Selective log; and each log can be partially
written with this command. The effectiveness of the log types depends on
customization. For the protocol concerning data transfers, see Section 5.4.
The number of a log to be written is specified as the Log address. For log data
consisting of multiple sectors, a sector offset can be specified as an instruction so
that data transfer starts from the specified sector. The number of sectors to be
transferred is specified as the Sector count.
If this command is not supported, or if an invalid value is specified for the Log
address, Sector count, or Sector offset, the Aborted Command error occurs.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) An error was detected during power-on processing (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(2) An error was detected during wake-up processing (in cases where wake-up
processing is required before execution of this command) (ST = 51h, ER =
04h).
(3) A write fault was detected while the write cache was disabled
(ST = 71h, ER = 10h).
(4) While the write cache is enabled, if the status indicating a completed transfer
(STS = 50h) is returned and a data write operation failed because a write fault
was detected during the data write operation, Abort will be returned for all
subsequent ATA commands (ST = 71h, ER = 04h). This state is cleared the
next time that the device is turned on.
(5) An invalid log sector address or invalid Sector count (number of sectors to be
transferred) is specified (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(6) The failure prediction capability is disabled (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(7) A check sum error was detected in the data transferred (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
(8) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 0Ch).
5-160
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
x
0
x
1
x
1
x
1
1
1
1
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
Sector offset (15-8)
Sector offset (7-0)
xx
SN EXP
SN
Log address
Sector count (15-8)
Sector count (7-0)
xx
SC EXP
SC
FR EXP
FR
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
xx
xx
SN EXP
SN
xx
xx
SC EXP
SC
xx
xx
ER
Error information
C141-E280
5-161
Interface
•
SCT COMMAND SET (SN = E0h)
Refer to SMART Command Transport (SCT).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting)
CM
DH
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
L
DV
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
00h
00h
xx
SN EXP
SN
E0h
00h
01h
xx
SC EXP
SC
FR EXP
FR
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
x
x
x
DV
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
xx
xx
SN EXP
SN
xx
xx
SC EXP
SC
xx
xx
ER
Error information
5-162
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
•
SCT WRITE DATA (SN = E1h)
Refer to SMART Command Transport (SCT).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting)
CM
DH
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
L
DV
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
00h
00h
xx
SN EXP
SN
E1h
xx
SC EXP
SC
xx
FR EXP
FR
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
x
x
x
DV
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
xx
xx
SN EXP
SN
xx
xx
SC EXP
SC
xx
xx
ER
Error information
C141-E280
5-163
Interface
(48) READ VERIFY SECTOR(S) EXT (X '42')
•
Description
This command is the extended command of the READ VERIFY SECTOR (S)
command. The LBA specification is increased from 28 bits to 48 bits, and the
maximum number of sectors that can be transferred by a single command is
changed from 100h to 10000h. Other command controls are the same as those of
the READ VERIFY SECTOR (S) command.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The command was issued in CHS mode (ST = 51h, ER = 04h).
The other error reporting conditions are the same as those of the READ
VERIFY SECTOR(S) command.
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
1
1
0
1
0
x
0
0
1
0
L
xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
Sector count (15-8)
Sector count (7-0)
FR EXP
FR
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
x
1
L
1
xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
xx
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
xx
ER
Error information
5-164
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
(49) WRITE UNCORRECTABLE EXT (X '45')
• Description
In this command, it is a purpose to make the uncorrectable error for specified LBA
intentionally. It reports on the uncorrectable error in the LBA against corresponding
LBA after this command ends the lead operation etc.
However, if a usual light operates afterwards even when the uncorrectable error is
made by this command, it is recoverable. The command is specified by Logical Form
(LBA), and the data transfer is unnecessary.
Moreover, SC was demanded and when "0000h" was specified, the processing of
65536 sectors was demanded.
Error re after the recovering transaction is done, disk write error that occurs while
executing this command is reported.
The write operation ends in the sector (Even if it is during the block) where the error
occurs. In this case, the number of sectors of remainder since the sector where the
logical block address and the error where the error occurs occur is set in the shadow
block register.
•
Error reporting conditions
(1) The command was issued in CHS mode
(ST = 51h, ER = 04h)
(2) When you specify excess the address of a possible write.
(ST = 51h, ER = 10h)
(3) When you specify excess the address of a possible light during the write.
(ST = 51h, ER = 10h)
(4) When you detect the write fault.
(ST = 71h, ER = 10h)
(5) When you issue the command in the CHS mode.
(ST = 51h, ER =04h)
(6) When the SATA communication error occurs.
(ST = 51h, ER = 14h)
(7) When you detect the errors other than the above-mentioned.
(ST = 51h, ER = 04h)
C141-E280
5-165
Interface
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
1
1
0
1
0
x
0
1
0
1
L
xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
Sector count (15-8)
Sector count (7-0)
xx
FR EXP
FR
Mode
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
Status information
DH
CH EXP
CH
1
L
1
x
xx
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
xx
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
xx
ER
Error information
Table 5.43 Operation mode
Feature
(bit 7-0) *1
Support
situation
Operation
55h
Create a pseudo-uncorrectable error
Create a flagged error
Support
No Support
(Abort)
AAh
(A pseudo-uncorrectable error is not creating on media.)
Others
Abort (Reserved)
*1: Feature bit 15-8: Reserved
5-166
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
(50) READ LOG DMA EXT (X '47')
•
Description
This command does operation that it is the same as READ LOG EXT doing transfer
to the host in the DMA mode.
For details, refer to READ LOG EXT.
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
x
1
x
0
x
0
x
0
1
1
1
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
Sector offset (15-8)
Sector offset (7-0)
xx
SN EXP
SN
Log address
Sector count (15-8)
Sector count (7-0)
xx
SC EXP
SC
FR EXP
FR
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
xx
xx
SN EXP
SN
xx
xx
SC EXP
SC
xx
xx
ER
Error information
C141-E280
5-167
Interface
(51) WRITE LOG DMA EXT (X '57')
•
Description
This command does operation that it is the same as WRITE LOG EXT doing
transfer to the host in the DMA mode.
For details, refer to WRITE LOG EXT.
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
x
1
x
0
x
1
x
0
1
1
1
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
Sector offset (15-8)
Sector offset (7-0)
xx
SN EXP
SN
Log address
Sector count (15-8)
Sector count (7-0)
xx
SC EXP
SC
FR EXP
FR
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
x
x
x
x
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
xx
xx
SN EXP
SN
xx
xx
SC EXP
SC
xx
xx
ER
Error information
5-168
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
(52) READ FP DMA QUEUED (X '60')
•
Description
For details about control of the READ FP DMA QUEUED command, see Section
5.4.6.
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
1
1
1
0
x
0
0
0
1
FUA
L
xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
xx
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
TAG
xx
FR EXP
FR
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
1
L
1
x
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
xx
xx
SN EXP
SN
xx
xx
SC EXP
SC
xx
xx
ER
Error information
FUA: If this bit is 1, the device always reads data from media
regardless of whether the data requested by the host is in the
cache.
TAG: Number of a TAG specified by the host
C141-E280
5-169
Interface
(53) WRITE FP DMA QUEUED (X '61')
•
Description
For details about control of the WRITE FP DMA QUEUED command, see
Section 5.4.6.
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
0
1
1
1
0
x
0
0
0
1
FUA
L
xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
xx
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
TAG
xx
FR EXP
FR
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
1
L
1
x
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
xx
xx
SN EXP
SN
xx
xx
SC EXP
SC
xx
xx
ER
Error information
FUA: If this bit is 1, the device always reports the status after data is
written to a medium.
TAG: Number of a TAG specified by the host
5-170
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
(54) WRITE MULTIPLE FUA EXT (X 'CE')
•
Description
The WRITE MULTIPLE FUA EXT command reports the status of a command
after user data is written to a medium, regardless of whether the write cache
feature is enabled or disabled. The other command control and error reporting
conditions are the same as those of the WRITE MULTIPLE EXT command.
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
1
1
1
0
1
0
x
1
1
1
0
L
xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
Sector count (15-8)
Sector count (7-0)
FR EXP
FR
xx
xx
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
x
1
L
1
xx
CH EXP
CH
LBA (47-40)
LBA (23-16)
LBA (39-32)
LBA (15-8)
LBA (31-24)
LBA (7-0)
xx
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
xx
ER
Error information
C141-E280
5-171
Interface
(55) FLUSH CACHE EXT (X 'EA')
•
•
Description
This command executes the same operations as the FLUSH CACHE command
(E7h). However, only LBA=1 can be specified in the command.
Error reporting conditions
(1) A SATA communication error occurred (ST = 51h, ER = 14h).
At command issuance (Shadow Block Registers setting contents)
CM
DH
1
1
1
1
1
0
x
1
0
1
0
L
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
SN EXP
SN
SC EXP
SC
FR EXP
FR
At command completion (Shadow Block Registers contents to be read)
ST
DH
Status information
1
L
1
x
xx
CH EXP
CH
xx
xx
CL EXP
CL
xx
xx
SN EXP
SN
xx
xx
SC EXP
SC
xx
xx
ER
Error information
5-172
C141-E280
5.3 Host Commands
5.3.3 Error posting
Table 5.43 lists the defined errors that are valid for each command.
Table 5.44 Command code and parameters (1/2)
Error Field
Status Field
COMMAND NAME
SFRW SFRR UNC IDNF ABRT TK0NF DRDY DWF ERR
RECALIBRATE
READ SECTOR(S)
WRITE SECTOR(S)
WRITE VERIFY
READ VERIFY SECTOR(S)
SEEK
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
EXECUTE DEVICE
DIAGNOSTIC
*1
*1
*1
V
*1
INITIALIZE DEVICE
PARAMETERS
V
V
V
V
DOWNLOAD MICROCODE
STANDBY IMMEDIATE
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
IDLE (UNLOAD)
IMMEDIATE
V
V
V
V
V
STANDBY
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
IDLE
CHECK POWER MODE
SLEEP
SMART
V
V
V
V
DEVICE CONFIGURATION
READ MULTIPLE
WRITE MULTIPLE
SET MULTIPLE MODE
READ DMA
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
WRITE DMA
V
READ BUFFER
FLUSH CACHE
WRITE BUFFER
IDENTIFY DEVICE
IDENTIFY DEVICE DMA
SET FEATURES
SECURITY SET PASSWORD
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
C141-E280
5-173
Interface
Table 5.44 Command code and parameters (2/2)
Error Field
Status Field
COMMAND NAME
TK0NF
SFRW SFRR UNC IDNF ABRT
DRDY DWF ERR
SECURITY UNLOCK
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
SECURITY ERASE PREPARE
SECURITY ERASE UNIT
SECURITY FREEZE LOCK
SECURITY DISABLE
PASSWORD
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
READ NATIVE MAX
ADDRESS
V
V
SET MAX
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
READ SECTOR(S) EXT
READ DMA EXT
V
V
V
V
READ NATIVE MAX
ADDRESS EXT
V
V
V
V
V
READ MULTIPLE EXT
READ LOG EXT
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
WRITE SECTOR(S) EXT
WRITE DMA EXT
SET MAX ADDRESS EXT
WRITE MULTIPLE EXT
WRITE DMA FUA EXT
WRITE LOG EXT
V
V
READ VERIFY SECTOR(S)
EXT
V
V
WRITE UNCORRECTABLE
EXT
READ LOG DMA EXT
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
WRITE LOG DMA EXT
READ FP DMA QUEUED
WRITE FP DMA QUEUED
WRITE MULTIPLE FUA EXT
FLUSH CACHE EXT
V
V
V
V: Valid on this command
*1: See the command descriptions.
*
For a description of each bit in the Error field and Status field,
see Section 5.2.4.
5-174
C141-E280
5.4 Command Protocol
5.4 Command Protocol
The host should confirm that the BSY bit of the Shadow Block Status register of
the device is 0 prior to issue a command. If BSY bit is 1, the host should wait for
issuing a command until BSY bit is cleared to 0.
Commands can be executed only when the DRDY bit of the Status register is 1.
However, the following commands can be executed even if DRDY bit is 0.
•
•
EXECUTE DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC
INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS
Note: Each FIS type is referred to as follows in this section.
FIS (Frame Information Structure) type
Abbreviation
RegHD
RegDH
Register - Host to Device
Register - Device to Host
DMA Active - Device to Host
DMA Active
DMA Setup
DMA Setup - Device to Host or Host to Device
(Bidirectional)
Set Device Bits - Device to Host
BIST Active - Bidirectional
PIO Setup - Device to Host
SetDB
BIST Active
PIO Setup
Data - Host to Device or Device to Host (Bidirectional) DATA
C141-E280
5-175
Interface
5.4.1 Non-data command protocol
Execution of the following commands does not involve data transfer between the
host and the device.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
RECALIBRATE
SEEK
READ VERIFY SECTOR(S) (EXT)
WRITE UNCORRECTABLE EXT
EXECUTE DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC
INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS
SET FEATURES
SET MULTIPLE MODE
READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS (EXT)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SET MAX ADDRESS (EXT)
SET MAX LOCK
SET MAX FREEZE LOCK
IDLE
IDLE (UNLOAD) IMMEDIATE
STANDBY
STANDBY IMMEDIATE
CHECK POWER MODE
SMART DISABLE OPERATION
SMART ENABLE/DISABLE AUTOSAVE
SMART ENABLE OPERATION
SMART EXECUTE OFFLINE IMMEDIATE
SMART RETURN STATUS
SECURITY ERASE PREPARE
SECURITY FREEZE LOCK
FLUSH CACHE (EXT)
5-176
C141-E280
5.4 Command Protocol
•
•
•
•
SLEEP
DEVICE CONFIGRATION RESTORE
DEVICE CONFIGRATION FREEZE LOCK
WRITE UNCORRECTABLE EXT
The following is the protocol for command execution without data transfer:
1) The device receives a non-data command with the RegHD FIS.
2) The device executes the received command.
3) Command execution is completed.
4) The device reports the completion of command execution by sending to the
host the RegDH FIS with 1 set in the I bit.
RegHD
Host
Device
RegDH
Figure 5.13 Non-data command protocol
C141-E280
5-177
Interface
5.4.2 PIO data-in command protocol
Execution of the following commands involves data transfers from the device to
the host system:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
IDENTIFY DEVICE
READ SECTOR(S) (EXT)
READ MULTI (EXT)
READ BUFFER
SMART READ DATA
SMATR READ LOG SECTOR
READ LOG EXT
DEVICE CONFIGRATION IDENTIFY
Data of one or more sectors is transferred from the device to the host.
An outline of this protocol is as follows:
1) The device receives a PIO data-in command with the RegHD FIS.
2) If an error remaining in the device prevents command execution, the device
sends the RegDH FIS with 1 set in the I bit.
3) When the device is ready to send data, it sets 0 in the BSY bit, 1 in the DRQ
bit, and 1 in the I bit of the Status field of the PIO Setup FIS, then sends this
FIS to the host. At this time, if the requested data is read from the last sector
to be processed, the device sets 0 in both the BSY bit and DRQ bit of the
E_Status field. Otherwise, the device sets 1 in the BSY bit and 0 in the DRQ
bit of the E_Status field.
4) The device sends the DATA FIS to the host.
5) When all data has been transferred, command execution is completed. If any
data remains to be transferred, this protocol is repeated starting from step 3).
(The maximum data size is 8 KB.)
5-178
C141-E280
5.4 Command Protocol
RegHD
PIO Setup
DATA
Host
Device
Figure 5.14 PIO data-in command protocol
C141-E280
5-179
Interface
5.4.3 PIO data-out command protocol
Execution of the following commands involves data transfers from the host system
to the device:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
WRITE SECTOR (S) (EXT)
WRITE MULTI (EXT) (FUA EXT)
WRITE BUFFER
WRITE VERIFY
SMART WRITE LOG SECTOR
SECURITY DISABLE PASSWORD
SECURITY ERASE UNIT
SECURITY SET PASSWORD
SECURITY UNLOCK
SET MAX SET PASSWORD
SET MAX UNLOCK
DOWNLOAD MICROCODE
WRITE LOG EXT
DEVICE CONFIGRATION SET
Data of one or more sectors is transferred from the host to the device.
An outline of this protocol is as follows:
1) The device receives a PIO data-out command with the RegHD FIS.
2) If an error remaining in the device prevents command execution, the device
sends the RegDH FIS with 1 set in the I bit.
3) When the device is ready to receive data, it sets 0 in the BSY bit and 1 in the
DRQ bit of the Status field of the PIO Setup FIS. At this time, the device sets
0 in the I bit of the Status field of the PIO Setup FIS for a data transfer to the
first sector, while it sets 1 in the I bit for a data transfer to any sector other
than the first sector. Then, it sends this FIS to the host. In the E_Status field,
the device sets 1 in the BSY bit and 0 in the DRQ bit.
5-180
C141-E280
5.4 Command Protocol
4) The device receives the DATA FIS from the host.
5) When all data has been transferred, the device sends the RegDH FIS (with 1
set in the I bit) to complete execution of the command. If the device has an
error, it reports the error. If any data remains to be received by the device,
this protocol is repeated starting from step 3). (The maximum data size is
8 KB.)
RegHD
PIO Setup
Host
Device
DATA
RegDH
Figure 5.15 PIO data-out command protocol
C141-E280
5-181
Interface
5.4.4 DMA data-in command protocol
DMA data-in commands include the following commands:
READ DMA (EXT)
IDENTFY DEVICE DMA
READ LOG DMA EXT
•
•
•
The DMA mechanism transfers data of more than one block from the device to the
host. The completion of a command is reported by an interruption.
An outline of this protocol is as follows:
1) The device receives a DMA data-in command with the RegHD FIS.
2) If an error remaining in the device prevents command execution, the device
sends the RegDH FIS with 1 set in the I bit.
3) When the device is ready to send data, it sends the Data FIS to the host.
4) When all data has been transferred, the device sends the RegDH FIS (with 1
set in the I bit) to complete execution of the command. If any data remains to
be sent by the device, this protocol is repeated starting from step 3). (The
maximum data size is 8 KB.)
RegHD
Host
Device
DATA
RegDH
Figure 5.16 DMA data-in command protocol
5-182
C141-E280
5.4 Command Protocol
5.4.5 DMA data-out command protocol
The DMA data-out command is the following command:
•
WRITE DMA (EXT) (FUA EXT)
WRITE LOG DMA EXT
•
The DMA mechanism transfers data of more than one block from the host to the
device. The completion of the command is reported by an interruption.
An outline of this protocol is as follows:
1) The device receives the DMA data-out command with the RegHD FIS.
2) If an error remaining in the device prevents command execution, the device
sends the RegDH FIS with 1 set in the I bit.
3) When the device is ready to receive data, it sends the DMA Active FIS to the
host.
4) The device receives the Data FIS from the host.
5) When all data has been transferred, the device sends the RegDH FIS (with 1
set in the I bit) to complete execution of the command. If any data remains to
be received by the device, this protocol is repeated starting from step 3). (The
maximum data size is 8 KB.)
RegHD
DMA Active
Host
Device
DATA
RegDH
Figure 5.17 DMA data-out command protocol
C141-E280
5-183
Interface
5.4.6 Native Command Queuing protocol
Native Queued commands include the following commands:
READ FP DMA QUEUED
WRITE FP DMA QUEUED
•
•
An outline of the command queuing protocol is as follows:
1) After the device receives a Native Queued command, if the command is
executable, the device sends to the host the RegDH FIS with the settings of I
bit = 0, BSY bit = 0, and DRQ bit = 0, and it places the command in the
command queue. Otherwise, the device sends the RegDH FIS to the host to
report an error.
2) If the device receives a command that is not a Native Queued command
during command queuing, the device sends to the host the RegDH FIS with
the settings of ERR bit = 1, I bit = 1, BSY bit = 0, DRQ bit = 0, and Error
register = 0x04 to report an abort.
3) When the device is ready to send data for the data transfer of the READ FP
DMA QUEUED command, it sends to the host the DMA Setup FIS with the
settings of TAG = #, D bit = 1, I bit = 0, and A bit = 0, and it then sends the
Data FIS to the host. (The Data FIS is transferred in units of up to 8 KB).
4) When the read data transfer requested by the command is completed and the
command is completed normally, the bit in the SActive field in the SetDB FIS
corresponding to the tag number of the completed command is set by the
device, and the device sets 0 in the Err bit and 0 in the Error register in the Set
Device Bits FIS. Then, it sends the Set Device Bits FIS to the host.
5) For the data transfer of the WRITE FP DMA QUEUED command, if the
DMA Setup Auto Activate function is disabled, the device sends to the host
the DMA Setup FIS with the settings of TAG = #, D bit = 0, A bit = 0, and I
bit = 0, and it sends the DMA Active FIS before it receives the Data FIS from
the host. (The Data FIS is transferred in units of up to 8 KB, with the actual
length of the Data FIS varying depending on the host).
6) If the DMA Setup AutoActivate function is enabled, the device sends to the
host the DMA Setup FIS with the settings of TAG = #, D bit = 0, A bit = 1,
and I bit = 0, and it then receives the Data FIS from the host (in units of 8 KB,
16 sectors).
7) When the write data transfer requested by the command is completed and the
command is completed normally, the bit in the SActive field in the SetDB FIS
corresponding to the tag number of the completed command is set by the
device, and the device sets 0 in the Err bit and 0 in the Error register in the Set
Device Bits FIS. Then, it sends the Set Device Bits FIS to the host. (The
DMA Setup AutoActivate function can be enabled and disabled by the SET
FEATURES command. The function is disabled by default.)
5-184
C141-E280
5.4 Command Protocol
8) If an uncorrectable error occurs during command queuing, the device sends to
the host the Set Device Bits FIS with the settings of ERR bit = 1, ERRReg =
ATAErrCode, I bit = 1, and SActive = 0 to report an error.
9) After reporting the error, the device accepts only the READ LOG EXT
command with page 10h specified and the reset requests (SoftReset and
COMRESET). The device reports abort for other commands.
10) If the device receives the READ LOG EXT command with page 10h
specified, queued commands are aborted. Then, after the device sends to the
host the SetDB FIS (ERR = 0, ERRReg = 0, I = 0, and SActive
=0xFFFFFFFF), it sends to the host the log data for the READ LOG EXT
command with page 10h specified and reports the status of this command.
Next, the command queuing function is enabled, and commands can be
accepted again.
RegHD
Host
Device
RegDH
DMA Setup
DATA
SetDB
Figure 5.18 READ FP DMA QUEUED command protocol
C141-E280
5-185
Interface
RegHD
RegDH
Host
Device
DMA Setup
DMACT
DATA
SetDB
Figure 5.19 WRITE FP DMA QUEUED command protocol
5-186
C141-E280
5.5 Power-on and COMRESET
5.5 Power-on and COMRESET
Figure 5.20 shows the power-on sequence, and Figure 5.21 shows the
COMRESET sequence.
Immediately after power-on or COMRESET, the host sets 0x7Fh in the Status
field of the Shadow Block Register and 0xFFh in other fields. After the power-on
sequence shown below and after communication with the SATA interface is
established, the host sets 0xFFh in the Status field of the Shadow Block Register.
The device completes the power-on sequence within 10 ms so that communication
with the SATA interface can be established.
Host
power
on
Host
releases
ComReset
Host
ComWake
Host
Align
Host
power
off
Host
releases
ComWake
Host
calibrate
Host
ComReset
Host
data
Host TX
(Device
RX)
Device
TX (Host
RX)
Device
Calibrate
Device
ComInit
Device
Align
Device
power
off
Device
data
Device
releases
ComInit
Device
ComWake
Device
power
on
Figure 5.20 Power-on sequence
C141-E280
5-187
Interface
Host
Host
releases
ComReset
Host/device
on
Host
calibrate
releases
ComWake
Host
Align
Host
ComReset
Host
ComWake
Host
data
Host TX
(Device RX)
Device TX
(Host RX)
Device
ComInit
Device
ComWake
Device
data
Device
releases
ComInit
Device
Calibrate
Device
Align
Figure 5.21 COMRESET sequence
5-188
C141-E280
CHAPTER 6 Operations
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
Reset and Diagnosis
Power Save
Power Save Controlled by Interface Power Management (IPM)
Read-ahead Cache
Write Cache
This chapter explains each of the above operations.
C141-E280
6-1
Operations
6.1 Reset and Diagnosis
This section explains the device responses to power-on and an accepted reset.
6.1.1 Response to power-on
Immediately after power is turned on, the host sets 0x7Fh in the Status field of the
Shadow Block and 0xFFh in other fields. After communication with the SATA
interface is established, the host sets 0xFFh in the Status field of the Shadow
Block. The device establishes communication with the SATA interface (PHY
Ready) within 10 ms. The device sends the FIS (STS = 50h) to notify the host that
the device is ready.
Note: Figure 6.1 assumes that power is turned on after the power-off state
continued for more than five seconds.
Figure 6.1 Response to power-on (when the host is powered
on earlier than the device)
6-2
C141-E280
6.1 Reset and Diagnosis
Figure 6.2 Response to power-on (when the device is powered on
earlier than the host)
C141-E280
6-3
Operations
6.1.2 Response to COMRESET
The response to COMRESET is almost the same as the response when power is
turned on and a power-on reset is then cancelled. The device establishes
communication with the SATA interface (PHY Ready) and sends the RegDH FIS
(STS = 50h) to notify the host that the device is ready. Then, the COMRESET
sequence is completed.
Figure 6.3 Response to COMRESET
6-4
C141-E280
6.1 Reset and Diagnosis
6.1.2.1 Software settings preservation
When a device is enumerated, software will configure the device using SET
FEATURES and other commands. These software settings are often preserved
across software reset but not necessarily across hardware reset. In Parallel ATA,
only commanded hardware resets can occur, thus legacy software only reprograms
settings that are cleared for the particular type of reset it has issued. In Serial ATA,
COMRESET is equivalent to hard reset and a non-commanded COMRESET may
occur if there is an asynchronous loss of signal. Since COMRESET is equivalent
to hardware reset, in the case of an asynchronous loss of signal some software
settings may be lost without legacy software knowledge. In order to avoid losing
important software settings without legacy driver knowledge, the software settings
reservation ensures that the value of important software settings is maintained
across a COMRESET. Software settings preservation may be enabled or disabled
using SET FEATURES with a subcommand code of 06h (refer to Section 5.3.2
(28)). If a device supports software settings preservation, the feature shall be
enabled by default.
6.1.2.2 COMRESET preservation requirements
The software settings that shall be preserved across COMRESET are listed below.
The device is only required to preserve the indicated software setting if it supports
the particular feature/command the setting is associated with.
•
INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS
Device settings established with the INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS
command.
•
•
Power Management Feature Set Standby Timer
The Standby timer used in the Power Management feature set.
Security mode state
The security mode state established by Security Mode feature set commands
(refer to Section 6.13 of the ATA/6 specification). The device shall not
transition to a different security mode state based on a COMRESET. For
example, the device shall not transition from the SEC5: Unlocked / not
Frozen state to state SEC4: Security enabled /Locked when a COMRESET
occurs, instead the device shall remain in the SEC5: Unlocked /not Frozen
state.
•
•
SECURITY FREEZE LOCK
The Frozen mode setting established by the SECURITY FREEZE LOCK
command.
SECURITY UNLOCK
The unlock counter that is decremented as part of a failed SECURITY
UNLOCK command attempt.
C141-E280
6-5
Operations
•
•
•
•
SET ADDRESS MAX (EXT)
The maximum LBA specified in SET MAX ADDRESS or SET MAX
ADDRESS EXT.
SET FEATURES (Write Cache Enable/Disable)
The write cache enable/disable setting established by the SET FEATURES
command with subcommand code of 02h or 82h.
SET FEATURES (Set Transfer Mode)
PIO, Multiword, and UDMA transfer mode settings established by the SET
FEATURES command with subcommand code of 03h.
SET FEATURES (Advanced Power Management Enable/Disable)
The advanced power management enable/disable setting established by the
SET FEATURES command with subcommand code of 05h or 85h. The
advanced power management level established in the Sector Count field when
advanced power management is enabled (SET FEATURES subcommand
code 05h) shall also be preserved.
•
SET FEATURES (Read Look-Ahead)
The read look-ahead enable/disable setting established by the SET
FEATURES command with subcommand code of 55h or AAh.
•
•
SET MULTIPLE MODE
The block size established with the SET MULTIPLE MODE command.
SET FEATURES (Write-Read-Verify feature set)
The Write-Read-Verify enable/disable setting established by the SET
FEATURES command with subcommand code of 0b h/8b h.
6-6
C141-E280
6.1 Reset and Diagnosis
6.1.3 Response to a software reset
When a software reset is accepted, the device performs a self-diagnosis, and it
sends the RegDH FIS (STS = 50h) to notify the host that the device is ready.
Then, the software reset sequence is completed.
Figure 6.4 Response to a software reset
C141-E280
6-7
Operations
6.2 Power Save
The host can change the power consumption state of the device by issuing a power
command to the device.
6.2.1 Power save mode
There are five types of power consumption state of the device including active
mode where all circuits are active.
•
•
•
•
•
Active mode
Active idle mode
Low power idle mode
Standby mode
Sleep mode
The device enters the active idle mode by itself. The device also enters the idle
mode in the same way after power-on sequence is completed. The subsequent
mode transition changes depending on the APM setting.
(1) Active mode
In this mode, all the electric circuit in the device are active or the device is under
seek, read or write operation.
A device enters the active mode under the following conditions:
•
The media access system is received.
(2) Active idle mode
In this mode, circuits on the device are set to power save mode.
The device enters the Active idle mode under the following conditions:
•
After completion of the command execution other than SLEEP and STANDBY
commands.
(3) Low power idle mode
Sets circuits on the device to the power save mode. The heads are disabled in the
safe state.
The device enters the low power mode under the following conditions:
•
After certain amount of time has elapsed in the active idle state
(APM Mode 0, Mode 1 and Mode 2)
•
Upon completion of the power-on sequence
6-8
C141-E280
6.2 Power Save
•
•
Upon receipt of a COMRESET
Upon receipt of Idle/Idle Intermediate
(4) Standby mode
In this mode, the spindle motor has stopped from the low power idle state.
The device can receive commands through the interface. However if a command
with disk access is issued, response time to the command under the standby mode
takes longer than the active, active idle, or low power idle mode because the
access to the disk medium cannot be made immediately.
The drive enters the standby mode under the following conditions:
•
•
A STANDBY or STANDBY IMMEDIATE command is issued.
A certain amount of time has elapsed in the low power idle state.
(APM Mode 2)
•
•
The time specified by the STANDBY or IDLE command has elapsed after
completion of the command.
A reset is issued in the sleep mode.
When one of following commands is issued, the command is executed normally
and the device is still stayed in the standby mode.
•
•
•
•
•
Reset (hardware or software)
STANDBY command
STANDBY IMMEDIATE command
INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS command
CHECK POWER MODE command
(5) Sleep mode
Sleep mode is the minimal of power consumption. The only method that returns
from Sleep mode is to execute Software Reset (SRST) or COMRESET. The
device enters to Standby mode after it returns from Sleep mode.
The drive enters the sleep mode under the following condition:
•
A SLEEP command is issued.
In this mode, the device does not accept the command. (It is ignored.)
C141-E280
6-9
Operations
6.2.2 Power commands
The following commands are available as power commands.
IDLE
IDLE IMMEDIATE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
STANDBY
STANDBY IMMEDIATE
SLEEP
CHECK POWER MODE
SET FEATURES (APM setting)
6-10
C141-E280
6.3 Power Save Controlled by Interface Power Management (IPM)
6.3 Power Save Controlled by Interface Power Management (IPM)
The host system can change the power consumption status of the interface by
issuing the PARTIAL or SLUMBER request to the device.
6.3.1 Power save mode of the interface
The interface power consumption states of this device can be separated into the
following three modes, including the Active mode where the device is in the
active state:
•
Active mode
•
Partial mode (shallow Interface Power Down)
Slumber mode (deep Interface Power Down)
•
*
The relationship of amount of power consumption in each mode is: Active
mode > Partial mode > Slumber mode. The following table specifies a rule
about the period in which the device must switch to Active mode from the
Interface Power Down state:
Period in which the device must switch to Active mode
Partial mode
Maximum 10 µs
Slumber mode
Maximum 10 ms
(1) Active mode
The interface is in the Active state and commands can be accepted.
(2) Partial mode
In this mode, (shallow) Power Save mode is set for the interface circuit.
The device switches to Partial mode when the following occurs:
•
The device receives the PMREQ_P signal from the host and responds with the
PMACK signal.
•
The device sends the PMREQ_S signal and the host responds with PMACK
signal.
The device cannot switch to Partial mode if the following condition is satisfied:
•
The device responds with the PMNAK signal because it is not waiting for
commands.
The device returns to Active mode from Partial mode when the following
condition is satisfied:
•
The device receives the COMRESET or COMWAKE signal from the host.
C141-E280
6-11
Operations
(3) Slumber mode
In this mode, the (deep) Power Save mode is set for the interface circuit.
The device switches to Slumber mode when the following occurs:
•
The device receives the PMREQ_P signal from the host and responds with the
PMACK signal.
•
The device sends the PMREQ_S signal and the host responds with PMACK
signal.
The device cannot switch to Slumber mode if the following condition is satisfied:
•
The device responds with the PMNAK signal because it is not waiting for
commands.
The device returns to Active mode from Slumber mode when the following
condition is satisfied:
•
The device receives the COMRESET or ComWake signal from the host.
6-12
C141-E280
6.4 Read-ahead Cache
6.4 Read-ahead Cache
Read-ahead Cache is the function for automatically reading data blocks upon
completion of the read command in order to read data from disk media and save
data block on a data buffer.
If a subsequent command requests reading of the read-ahead data, data on the data
buffer can be transferred without accessing the disk media. As the result, faster
data access becomes possible for the host.
6.4.1 Data buffer structure
This device contains a data buffer. This buffer is divided into two areas: one area
is used for MPU work, and the other is used as a read cache for another command.
(See Figure 6.5)
Example of 16 MB buffer
16,384 KB (16,777,216 bytes)
For MPU work
For R/W command
Figure 6.5 Data buffer structure
The read-ahead operation is done by the following commands.
•
•
•
•
READ SECTOR (S) (EXT)
READ MULTIPLE (EXT)
READ DMA (EXT)
READ FP DMA QUEUED
C141-E280
6-13
Operations
6.4.2 Caching operation
The caching operation is performed only when the commands listed below are
received. If any of the following data are stored on the data buffer, the data is sent
to the host system.
•
•
All of the sector data that this command processes.
A part of the sector data including the start sector, that this command
processes.
If part of the data to be processed is stored on the data buffer, the remaining data is
read from disk media and sent to the host system.
(1) Commands that are targets of caching
The commands that are targets of caching are as follows:
•
•
•
•
READ SECTOR (S) (EXT)
READ MULTIPLE (EXT)
READ DMA (EXT)
READ FP DMA QUEUED
However, if the caching function is prohibited by the SET FEATURES command,
the caching operation is not performed.
(2) Data that is a target of caching
The data that is a target of caching are as follows:
1) Read-ahead data that is read from disk media and saved to the data buffer
upon completion of execution of a command that is a target of caching.
2) Pre-read data that is read from disk media and saved to the data buffer before
execution of a command that is a target of caching.
3) Data required by a command that is a target of caching and has been sent to
the host system one. If the sector data requested by the host has not been
completely stored in the read cache portion of the buffer, this data does not
become a target of caching. Also, if sequential hits occur continuously, the
caching-target data required by the host becomes invalid because that data is
overwritten by new data.
6-14
C141-E280
6.4 Read-ahead Cache
(3) Invalidating caching-target data
Data that is a target of caching on the data buffer is invalidated under the
following conditions:
1)-1Any command other than the following commands is issued. (All caching-
target data is invalidated.)
READ BUFFER
WRITE BUFFER
RECALIBRATE
FORMAT TRACK
SET FEATURES
SECURITY ERASE UNIT
DEVICE CONFIGURATION
DOWNLOAD MICROCODE
WRITE UNCORRECTABLE EXT
READ LOG (DMA) EXT
WRITE LOG (DMA) EXT
UNSUPPORT COMMAND (INVALID COMMAND)
1)-2Commands that partially invalidate caching data
READ DMA/READ MULTIPLE/READ SECTOR(S)
READ DMA EXT/READ MULTIPLE EXT/READ SECTOR(S) EXT
READ FP DMA QUEUED
WRITE DMA/WRITE MULTIPLE/WRITE SECTOR(S)
WRITE DMA EXT/WRITE MULTIPLE EXT/WRITE SECTOR(S) EXT
WRITE DMA FUA EXT/WRITE MULTIPLE FUA EXT
WRITE FP DMA QUEUED
SMART
2) A COMRESET is issued or the power is turned off.
3) When HOST CRC ERROR has occurred.
C141-E280
6-15
Operations
6.4.3 Using the read segment buffer
Methods of using the read segment buffer are explained for following situations.
6.4.3.1 Miss-hit
In this situations, the top block of read requested data is not stored at all in the data
buffer. As a result, all of the read requested data is read from disk media.
1) HAP (host address pointer) and DAP (disk address pointer) are defined in the
head of the segment allocated from Buffer. (If pre-read is executed, HAP is
set at the requested data reading position.)
HAP (host address pointer)
Read segment
DAP (disk address pointer)
2) During reading of read requested data, the request data that has already been
read is sent to the host system.
Read requested data is
stored until this point
HAP
Read requested data
Free space
DAP
3) When reading of read requested data is completed and transfer of the read
requested data to the host system is completed, reading of the disk continues
until a certain amount of data is stored.
HAP (stop)
Read requested data
Read-ahead data
DAP
4) The following cache valid data is for the read command that is executed next:
Cache valid data
LAST LBA START LBA
6-16
C141-E280
6.4 Read-ahead Cache
6.4.3.2 Sequential hit
When the read command that is targeted at a sequential address is received after
execution of the read commands is completed, the read command transmits the
Read requested data to the host system continuing read-ahead without newly
allocating the buffer for read.
1) When the sequential read command is received, HAP is set in the sequential
address of the last read command, and DAP is set at a present read position as
it is.
HAP (host address pointer)
Read requested data
Read-ahead data
Cache valid data
Free space
DAP (disk address pointer)
2) During reading of read requested data, the request data that has already been
read is sent to the host system.
HAP (host address pointer)
Cache valid data
Free space
Read requested data
DAP (disk address pointer)
3) When reading of read requested data is completed and transfer of the read
requested data to the host system is completed, the read-ahead operation
continues until a certain amount of data is stored.
HAP (host address pointer)
Read-ahead Free
Cache valid data
Read requested data
data
space
DAP (disk address pointer)
4) The following cache valid data is for the read command that is executed next:
Cache valid data
LAST LBA START LBA
C141-E280
6-17
Operations
6.4.3.3 Full hit
In this situation, all read requested data is stored in the data buffer. Transfer of the
read requested data is started from the location where hit data is stored. For data
that is a target of caching and remains before a full hit, the data is retained when
execution of the command is completed. This is done so that a new read-ahead
operation is not performed. If the full hit command is received during the read-
ahead operation, a transfer of the read requested data starts while the read-ahead
operation is in progress.
1) An example is the state shown below where the previous read command is
executing sequential reading. First, HAP is set at the location where hit data
is stored.
HAP end location of the previous read command
HAP (It is reset to the hit data location for transfers.)
HAP
Cache data
Full hit data
Cache data
DAP
DAP end location of the previous read command
2) The read requested data is transferred, and a new read-ahead operation is not
performed.
HAP
(stop)
Cache data
Full hit data
Cache data
6-18
C141-E280
6.4 Read-ahead Cache
6.4.3.4 Partial hit
In this situation, a part of read requested data including the top sector is stored in
the data buffer. A transfer of the read requested data starts from the address where
the data that is hit is stored until the top sector of the read requested data.
Remaining part of insufficient data is read then.
An example is a case where a partial hit occurs in cache data, as shown below.
Cache valid data
START LBA
LAST LBA
1) HAP is set at the address where partial hit data is stored, and Transfer is
started.
HAP (host address pointer)
Cache valid data
Partial hit data
2) DAP and HAP are set at the head of Buffer newly allocated, and insufficient
data is read.
HAP (host address pointer)
Read segment
DAP (disk address pointer)
3) When reading the read requested data ends and the transmission of the read
requested data to the host system ends, the read-ahead operation continues
until a certain amount of data is stored.
The method of storing the read-ahead data at Partial hit is the same as the
Miss hit.
Cache valid data
LAST LBA START LBA
C141-E280
6-19
Operations
6.5 Write Cache
Write Cache is the function for reducing the command processing time by
separating command control to disk media from write control to disk media.
When Write Cache is permitted, the write command can be keep receiving as long
as the space available for data transfers remains free on the data buffer. Because
of this function, command processing appears to be completed swiftly from the
viewpoint of the host. It improves system throughput.
6.5.1 Cache operation
(1) Command that are targets of caching
The Commands that are targets of caching are as follows:
•
WRITE SECTOR(S) (EXT)
WRITE MULTIPLE (EXT) (FUA)
•
•
•
WRITE DMA (EXT) (FUA)
WRITE FP DMA QUEUED
However, the caching operation is not performed when the caching function is
prohibited by the SET FEATURES command.
(2) Invalidation of cached data
If an error occurs during writing onto media, write processing is repeated up to as
many times as specified for retry processing. If retry fails for a sector because the
retry limit is reached, automatic alternate sector processing is executed for the
sector. If the automatic alternate sector processing fails, the data in the sector for
which automatic alternate sector processing failed is invalidated without being
guaranteed.
Moreover, when the command (clause 6.4.2(3)) is accepted and HOST CRC Error
is generated, the cashing data is invalidated.
<Exception>
•
If a COMRESET, a software reset or command is received while a transfer of
one sector of data is in progress, data is not written in the sector of the media
where the interruption occurred, and sectors accepted before interruption
occurred is written in the medium.
6-20
C141-E280
6.5 Write Cache
(3) Status report in the event of an error
The status report concerning an error occurring during writing onto media is
created when the next command is issued. Where the command reporting the
error status is not executed, only the error status is reported. Only the status of an
error that occurs during write processing is reported.
<Exceptions>
The error status is not reported in the following case:
•
The COMRESET or software reset is received after an error has occurred
during writing to media.
→ The COMRESET or software reset processing is performed as usual.
The error status that has occurred during writing to media is not reported.
(4) Enabling and disabling
Enabling and disabling of the Write Cache function can be set only with the SET
FEATURES command. The setting does not changed even when the error status
is reported.
The initial setting is stored in the system area of media. System area information
is loaded whenever the power is turned on.
(5) COMRESET and software reset response
When a COMRESET or software reset is received while cached data is stored on
the data buffer, data of the data buffer is written on the media, and reset processing
is then performed. This is true for both a hard reset and soft reset.
(6) Cashing function when power supply is turned on
The cashing function is invalid until Calibration is done after the power supply is
turned on (about 10 sec). It is effective in Default after that as long as the cashing
function is not invalidly set by the SET FEATURES command.
IMPORTANT
If Write Cache is enabled, there is a possibility that data transferred
from the host with the Write Cache enable command is not completely
written on disk media before the normal end interrupt is issued.
If an unrecoverable error occurs while multiple commands that are
targets of write caching are received, the host has difficulty
determining which command caused the error. (An error report is
not issued to the host if automatic alternating processing for the
error is performed normally.) Therefore, the host cannot execute a
retry for the unrecoverable error while Write Cache is enabled. Be
very careful on this point when using this function.
If a write error occurs, an abort response is sent to all subsequent
commands.
C141-E280
6-21
This page is intentionally left blank.
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance and Diagnosis
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
Maintenance
Operation Confirmation
Troubleshooting Procedure
Disk Drive Removal Procedure
Spare Disk Drive
This chapter describes the maintenance, diagnosis, operation check,
troubleshooting, removal, and replacement of the disk drive. The following are
explained:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Rules for regular maintenance and troubleshooting
Display of maintenance level (field and factory)
Display of machine revision number and number change in the field
Tools and test devices needed for each maintenance level
Standard testing for each maintenance level
Recommended procedure for troubleshooting and fault diagnosis
Disk drive removal and replacement procedure
Spare disk drive
C141-E280
7-1
Maintenance and Diagnosis
7.1 Maintenance
7.1.1 Rules for maintenance
The following cautions must be observed to prevent injury during troubleshooting
or maintenance.
Static, Damage
1. Don't install or remove a PCA or connect or disconnect a cable
or connector plug when the drive is powered. This may give
you an electric shock.
2. Avoid dangerous detergent when the disk drive is cleaned.
The following cautions must be observed to avoid damaging the disk drive during
troubleshooting and maintenance.
Device damage
1. Before touching a PCA or the drive, wear a wrist strap and
perform the human body grounding to discharge static
electricity from your body. This will prevent irreparable
damage to the PCA and the head of the drive.
2. Don't install or remove a PCA or connect or disconnect a cable
or connector plug when the drive is powered. This will prevent
electrical damage to the disk drive.
3. Operating the disk drive with one or more PCA missing will be
unpredictable. Only power the drive with all boards installed.
4. Avoid any detergent when cleaning the disk drive.
5. Keep all vents open opened and unblocked.
6. Do not apply excessive force to the cover under any
circumstances. Doing so may cause irreparable damage to the
cover.
7-2
C141-E280
7.1 Maintenance
7.1.2 Maintenance requirements
(1) Preventive maintenance
The disk drive needs no preventive maintenance, not even the air filter needs to be
changed.
Device damage
The DE is completely sealed. Do not open the DE in the field.
(2) Service life
See Section (3), "Service life", in Section 1.7.
(3) Exchangeable parts in field
The PCA and the DE cannot be replaced separately in the field. Replace the
whole disk drive.
(4) Service system and repair
Fujitsu Limited has a disk drive service system and repair facility. When making
a request for repair or parts replacement, you should provide related information
usually including:
a) Model name of disk drive, part number (P/N), disk drive revision number,
manufacture serial number (S/N), and date of manufacture of the disk drive
b) Circumstances when the fault occurred
−
−
−
Date of trouble occurred
System configuration
Environmental conditions (including temperature, humidity, and voltage)
c) Fault history of the drive
d) Details of the fault
−
−
−
−
−
Description of the fault
Issued command and specified parameters
Status (Status/Error register)
Interval of the fault
Other information for fault diagnosis
C141-E280
7-3
Maintenance and Diagnosis
Data corruption
When asking for repair, save all data stored in the disk drive
beforehand. Fujitsu Limited is not responsible for any loss of data
during service and repair.
(5) Notes on handling
a.
General notes
a) Vibrations and shocks more severe than allowed will cause fatal damage to
the device so be very careful. Be especially careful when unpacking the
device.
b) Do not leave the device in a dusty environment.
c) Because the device uses MR (MR head) and static sensitive CMOS
semiconductors take the following precautions, be careful of the handling on
the following points after the device is unpacked.
−
Use an antistatic mat, etc. in the environment for handling the equipment.
The worker should also be physically grounded (e.g., wearing a wrist
strap).
−
Hold by the DE section, do not directly touch the PCA unit
unnecessarily.
b.
Unpacking
a) Use a flat workplace, find which side of the pack is up and be careful not to
have the wrong side facing upwards. Do not place the device directly on a
hard table, place it on something soft such as a rubber mat.
b) Be careful not to apply any excessive force to the packed device when
removing the shock absorbing material.
c) When taking the device out of the antistatic bag, be especially careful not to
apply any excessive force to the PCA or to the interface connector section.
d) Never ever remove the DE seal label and screws and the DE cover.
c.
Installation
a) When the power is ON, do not change the switch setting, or connecting, or
disconnecting connectors.
b) Do not move the device or disconnect connectors with the power ON or until
the disk drive unit comes to a complete stop after the power is turned OFF.
(It is required to wait more than 30 seconds.)
7-4
C141-E280
7.1 Maintenance
d.
Packaging
a) Place the device in an antistatic vinyl bag along with a desiccant (silica gel).
b) It is recommended that you use the shock absorption cushion material and
packaging that contained the device when it was delivered by Fujitsu.
If the same packaging material cannot be used, use a shock absorbent box that
will transmit shocks directly to the device. When using this type of box,
adequately protect the PCA surface and interface connector section.
c) Place a label showing which side is up and clearly stating the notes on
handling on the outside of the packaging.
e.
Delivery
a) As a rule, deliver as it is packaged and keep the up side up.
b) If delivering a single drive after it is unpacked, take it only a short distance.
Also, use shock absorbent material to protect it against shock and vibration.
Deliver an unpacked device in either of the allowable packed positions. Refer
to Section 3.2.
f.
Storage
a) Store in dampproof packaging.
b) Take care that the environmental requirements satisfy the non-operating
environmental specifications described in Section 1.4.
c) To prevent condensation, do not subject the device to sudden changes of
temperature.
7.1.3 Maintenance levels
Because of its compact size and special repair requirements, it is recommended
that the whole disk drive be replaced. This section describes maintenance on two
levels.
(1) Field maintenance (disk drive replacement)
Replacement at the user site.
•
•
•
Disk drive replacement requires ordinary tools.
Usually, the user, retailer, seller, or OEM trader will replace the drive.
(2) Factory maintenance (parts replacement)
•
•
Only Fujitsu can perform maintenance at this level.
This includes maintenance training and assisting other OEM traders. The
OEM trader usually assists the retailer and seller.
•
Use the factory level tools and test equipment. This includes recommended
spare parts and repairing or replacing various parts.
C141-E280
7-5
Maintenance and Diagnosis
7.1.4 Disk drive revision number
The disk drive revision number is a single alphabetic character followed by a
single alphanumeric character. It is stuck on the DE and marked on the revision
number label. Figure 7.1 shows the disk drive revision number label format.
Disk drive
revision number
Firmware
code/revision
Figure 7.1 Disk drive revision number label
7-6
C141-E280
7.1 Maintenance
(1) Revision number marking at delivery
The machine revision number is indicated by crossing out up to the relevant
number in the relevant alphabetic character row using = marks (see Figure 7.2).
(2) Revision number change in the field
When a part is replaced in the field or other modifications are made, the machine
revision number may need to be changed. The level is indicated by crossing out
the relevant number in the relevant alphabetic character row using { marks (see
Figure 7.2).
(3) Firmware code and revision
First 4-digit indicates a firmware code and rest 4-digit indicates its revision.
Note:
For a change of revision number after delivery, Fujitsu issues a
"Change Request/Notice" and the disk drive revision number after
the change. When a change is made at the user site, the revision
number level should be changed as described above.
Revision number mark when delivered
A2 Revision
Revision number change in the field
A3 Revision
Figure 7.2 Display of disk drive revision number
C141-E280
7-7
Maintenance and Diagnosis
7.1.5 Tools and test equipment
At the field maintenance level, only ordinary hand tools are required for
troubleshooting and repairing the disk drive. Special tools and test equipment is
not required.
Factory level tools and test equipment are beyond the scope of this manual.
7.1.6 Self-diagnostics
The disk drive has the following self-diagnostics. These self-diagnostics allow
normal basic operation of an isolated disk drive can be checked.
•
•
Initial self-diagnostics
SMART command (SMART Execute Off-Line Immediate command)
7.1.7 Test
The disk drive test can be divided into the following three levels.
•
•
Operating test (See Subsection 7.2.1, "Operating test.")
Diagnostic test (See Subsection 7.2.2, "Diagnostic test.")
Figure 7.3 shows the relationship between the test level and troubleshooting.
Tables 7.1 and 7.2 show the check contents.
7-8
C141-E280
7.1 Maintenance
Start
Yes
Check the host system
(Table 7.1)
Operation test with the
host computer or test
equipment
No
Analyze the system
related failure
System normal?
Yes
Disk drive
replacement or repair
No
Test acceptable?
Yes
No
Disk drive normal?
Yes
Continue with the
operation
Diagnostic test with
the host computer or
test equipment
No
Test acceptable?
Yes
Test using voltage or
temperature stress
No
Disk drive failure
analysis (Table 7.2)
Test acceptable?
Yes
No failure
Figure 7.3 Test flowchart
C141-E280
7-9
Maintenance and Diagnosis
Table 7.1 Status Field contents
bit
Contents
BIT0=1
BIT1, 2
Shown in Table 7.2
It is not necessary to take any measure when other bits are
normal, in spite of these bits. (Normal)
BIT3=1
(1) Check whether vibration is transmitted because of the way
the disk drive is mounted.
BIT5=1
Any of these
(2) Check the power, cable, and connector.
BIT6=0 cases.
BIT7=1
(3) If it is concluded that the disk drive is the cause, replace the
disk drive.
Table 7.2 Disposition for Error Field contents
Error bit
Method of disposition
BIT0
BIT1
BIT4
BIT6
Any of these If it is concluded that the disk drive is the cause, replace the
bits are "1".
drive.
BIT4=1 and BIT2=1
(1) Check the status of the host system, cable, and drive.
or
(2) If it is concluded that the disk drive is the cause,
replace the drive.
BIT3=1 and BIT2=1
or
BIT2
BIT7
Any of these
bits are "1".
7-10
C141-E280
7.2 Operation Confirmation
7.2 Operation Confirmation
7.2.1 Operation test
When the host computer is processing data, the disk drive monitors disk drive
operation errors including data, command, and seek errors. The host is notified of
the error that the disk drive detected and the user is notified of its result.
The user may notice intermittent and indefinite failures such as overlong execution
time, abnormal noise, abnormal odor, or failures in particular processes.
The failure reported in the operation test will need further investigation. To
ascertain the cause of the disk drive failure reported, the disk drive can be
replaced. Failures in the operation test are often not caused by the host system.
For example, not having enough power supply reserve, a loose cable connection,
no timing and mechanical reserves, or relationship with other systems.
In normal operation, the disk drive itself or the host determines the processing
(return or halt) following the detected failure state.
To troubleshoot the failure reported in the test at this level, accurately reproduce
the condition that caused the failure. Then, by replacing the disk drive, try to
separate the fault from the other sections of the disk drive host system.
7.2.2 Diagnostic test
The diagnostic test is used to separate a confirmed disk drive failure to a disk drive
subassembly or to check the disk drive performance. A test of this level usually
includes a specific disk drive function or concentrated execution of a group of
functions. The test is usually performed by a factory engineer and not where the
failure was reported. The disk drive is tested using another host computer or test
equipment.
To troubleshoot the disk drive failure in the diagnostic test, the engineer will
reproduce the failure condition. The engineer then isolates the failure to a
subassembly or part of the disk drive.
The procedures used in a test of this level great depend on the test equipment used.
It is beyond the range of this manual.
C141-E280
7-11
Maintenance and Diagnosis
7.3 Troubleshooting Procedure
7.3.1 Troubleshooting procedure
This section describes the troubleshooting procedures for a disk drive failure at
field maintenance level described in Subsection 7.1.3.
In this section, troubleshooting is made to isolate the reported failure to the disk drive
or a host system. Usually, troubleshooting is necessary only when a cause of failure is
uncertain or unknown. When a cause of failure is clear (for example, abnormal sound
in the DE or burnt parts on the PCA), a level of troubleshooting is low.
7.3.2 Troubleshooting disk drive replaced in field
It is recommended that the whole drive be replaced in maintenance of this level. If
replacing the drive corrects the fault, return the old drive to the factory for testing
and repair. If the new drive shows the same fault as the one that was removed, the
failure is elsewhere in the system.
System level troubleshooting, shown in Table 7.3, is performed at the user site to
isolate the reported failure to the disk drive or system.
7-12
C141-E280
7.3 Troubleshooting Procedure
Table 7.3 System level and field troubleshooting
Check to be made
Recommended work
DC power voltage
level
Confirm that the DC power voltage is within ±5% of the standard value.
When measured at +5 V power pins P8 or P9 and GND pins P4-P6, P10,
or P12 of the power supply connector, the +5 DVC must be 4.75 to 5.25
VDC.
Refer to Sections 3.3 and 5.1.4.
DC power ripple
noise
Check that the maximum ripple at +5 VDC power is less than 100 mV
peak to peak and 200 mV peak to peak respectively.
SATA Interface
Connection
Confirm that the SATA interface at the drive is properly connected with
the host receptacle.
(Including a
Connection of
Power Segment)
System cable
Confirm that all cable connections throughout the system correctly
connected.
System diagnostic To further isolate the failure, if it can be done, execute the system level
test
diagnostic routine described in the host computer manual.
Intermittent or
indefinite error
Check the AC voltage level at the power supply section and recheck the
DC voltage level at the disk drive power supply connector.
If the AC voltage level is abnormal, or if there is a lot of electrical noise,
notify the user.
If the DC voltage level is unstable, replace the power supply section.
If possible, replace the disk drive. If the fault remains, the disk drive is
not the case. For suggestions to isolate the failure further, refer to the
hardware and software manuals provided with the system.
C141-E280
7-13
Maintenance and Diagnosis
7.3.3 Troubleshooting at factory
When the trouble is recovered by replacing the drive at field (Subsection 7.3.2),
troubleshoot the replaced drive to isolate the trouble to the subassembly parts.
To shorten the troubleshooting time and repairing time, gather the data, such as
environmental data and other information, from the user and then return the failed
drive to the factory to repair.
At the factory, user environment is made and a reappearance test is performed. To
reappearance a same trouble at user, the failed drive is connected to the host
system. If no trouble occurs by the normal test, the reappearance test is performed
by adding the voltage/temperature load using a disk drive tester or tools according
to the user environment.
When a trouble reappeared, troubleshoot the cause of failure. Then, replace the
failed unit or parts.
As this level maintenance is made by a factory, this maintenance level is beyond
the scope of this manual.
Device damage
The disk enclosure (DE) must never to be opened in the field.
Opening the disk enclosure may cause irreparable damage.
7-14
C141-E280
7.4 Disk Drive Removal Procedure
7.4 Disk Drive Removal Procedure
The method and procedures to demount the disk drive to check the jumper
terminal, change the jumper position, or replace the device differ depend on the
system cabinet structure. Therefore, for actual working procedures, the specific
conditions necessary for each system must be determined. The general removal
procedures, with notes, are as follows.
a) Disconnect the power-interface cable.
b) Remove the screws that attach the drive and remove the drive from the system
cabinet.
c) When storing or transporting the drive, pack it an antistatic bag in compliance
with section 7.1.2 (5) d. and (5) e..
To protect the device from damage and prevent the worker getting hurt, observe
the following cautions and precautions in Subsection 7.1.1.
Damage or Device damage
1. Perform any removal after the system power is completely
disconnected. The cable must not be disconnected and the
screws that attach the drive must not be removed with the
power ON.
2. Do not move the drive and attach or detach the connector until
it comes to a complete stop (about 30 s after the power is
turned OFF).
3. Perform the human body grounding to discharge any static
electricity from your body. (Be sure to wear a wrist strap)
7.5 Spare Disk Drive
See Subsection 1.2.2, "Model and product number," to order a disk drive for
replacement or as a spare.
C141-E280
7-15
This page is intentionally left blank.
Glossary
Actuator
AT bus
Head positioning assembly. The actuator consists of a voice coil motor and head
arm. If positions the read-write (R-W) head.
A bus between the host CPU and adapter board
ATA (AT Attachment) standard
The ATA standard is for a PC AT interface regulated to establish compatibility
between products manufactured by different vendors. Interfaces based on this
standard are called ATA interfaces.
Command
Commands are instructions to input data to and output data from a drive.
Commands are written in command registers.
Connector (Connector Plug: Host system side)
It means a host receptacle (described in this Glossary), when a drive is connected
to a host system without use an interface cable. In case of use an interface cable
for connecting to a host system, it means the connector plug which consists of
terminals and housing of the cable.
Cover
Data block
DE
A lid of DE. It is a metallic part labeled the model name and its revision. This
part is attached to the opposite side from PCBA on the disk drive.
A data block is the unit used to transfer data. A data block normally indicates a
single sector.
Disk enclosure. The DE includes the disks, built-in spindle motor, actuator, heads,
and air filter. The DE is sealed to protect these components from dust.
Host receptacle
Host receptacle is a connector type on the host system that the signal segment of
Serial-ATA unifies with the power supply segment.
C141-E280
GL-1
Glossary
Master (Device 0)
The master is the first drive that can operate on the AT bus. The master is daisy-
chained with the second drive which can operate in conformity with the ATA
standard.
MTBF
MTTR
Mean time between failures. The MTBF is calculated by dividing the total
operation time (total power-on time) by the number of failures in the disk drive
during operation.
Mean time to repair. The MTTR is the average time required for a service person
to diagnose and repair a faulty drive.
PIO (Programmed input-output)
Mode to transfer data under control of the host CPU
Positioning
Sum of the seek time and mean rotational delay
Power save mode
The power save modes are idle mode, standby mode, and sleep mode.
In idle mode, the drive is neither reading, writing, nor seeking data. In standby
mode, the spindle motor is stopped and circuits other than the interface control
circuit are sleeping. The drive enters sleep mode when the host issues the SLEEP
command.
Reserved
Reserved bits, bytes, and fields are set to zero and unusable because they are
reserved for future standards.
Rotational delay
Time delay due to disk rotation. The mean delay is the time required for half a
disk rotation. The mean delay is the average time required for a head to reach a
sector after the head is positioned on a track.
Seek time
The seek time is the time required for a head to move from the current track to
another track. The seek time does not include the mean rotational delay.
GL-2
C141-E280
Glossary
Serial-ATA
Serial ATA is an extension specification from the current Parallel ATA physical
storage interface. The parallel data transfer of Parallel ATA is changed to the
serial data transfer in Serial-ATA for obtaining greater data transfer speed.
Slave (Device 1)
The slave is a second drive that can operate on the AT bus. The slave is daisy-
chained with the first drive operating in conformity with the ATA standard.
Status
The status is a piece of one-byte information posted from the drive to the host
when command execution is ended. The status indicates the command termination
state.
VCM
Voice coil motor. The voice coil motor is excited by one or more magnets. In this
drive, the VCM is used to position the heads accurately and quickly.
C141-E280
GL-3
This page is intentionally left blank.
Acronyms and Abbreviations
HDD
Hard disk drive
A
I
ABRT Aborted command
AIC
AMNF Address mark not found
ATA AT attachment
Automatic idle control
IDNF
ID not found
IRQ14 Interrupt request 14
L
AWG American wire gage
LED
MB
Light emitting diode
B
M
BBK
BIOS
Bad block detected
Basic input-output system
Megabyte
MB/S Megabyte per seconds
C
MPU
Micro processor unit
CORR Corrected data
P
CH
CL
CM
CSR
CSS
CY
Cylinder high field
Cylinder low field
Command field
PCA
PIO
Printed circuit assembly
Programmed input-output
Current sense resistor
Current start/stop
Cylinder field
R
RLL
Run-length-limited
RoHS The Restrictions of the use of
certain Hazardous Substances in
electrical and electronic equipment
D
dBA
DE
dB A-scale weighting
Disk enclosure
DH
Device/head field
S
DRDY Drive ready
SA
System area
SATA Serial-ATA
DRQ
DSC
DWF
Data request bit
Drive seek complete
Drive write fault
SC
SG
SN
ST
Sector count field
Signal ground
Sector number field
Status field
E
ECC
ER
ERR
EU
Error checking and correction
Error field
Error
T
TPI
Track per inches
TRONF Track 0 not found
European Union
Typ
Typical
F
FR
Feature field
U
UNC
VCM
Uncorrectable ECC error
G
GB
HA
Gigabyte
V
Voice coil motor
H
Host adapter
C141-E280
AB-1
This page is intentionally left blank.
Index
caching operation..................................... 6-14
caching-target data, invalidating ............. 6-15
capability, off-line data
collection.............................................. 5-63
cashing function at power-on .................. 6-21
caution, handling ....................................... 3-7
CHECK POWER MODE........................ 5-52
checksum.............................. 5-64, 5-66, 5-68
circuit
controller................................................ 2-3
read/write ............................................... 2-3
circuit configuration ...........................4-3, 4-5
circulation filter ......................................... 2-3
CN1 ......................................................... 3-10
code
command...................................5-27, 5-173
diagnostic............................................. 5-41
command code..............................5-27, 5-173
command code and parameter................. 5-27
command data structure........................... 5-66
command description............................... 5-30
command execution, status after ............. 5-22
command field......................................... 5-26
command for caching .....................6-14, 6-20
command processing during
self-calibration ....................................... 4-9
command protocol................................. 5-175
DMA data-in...................................... 5-182
DMA data-out.................................... 5-183
native queued..................................... 5-184
non-data ..................................5-176, 5-177
PIO data-in......................................... 5-178
PIO data-out....................................... 5-180
command, host......................................... 5-27
command, power ..................................... 6-10
communication layer ............................... 5-12
compact ..................................................... 1-2
compensating open loop gain .................... 4-8
COMRESET.......................................... 5-187
COMRESET preservation
A
A/D converter circuit .............................. 4-11
AAM ..................................................... 5-125
acceleration mode ................................... 4-18
acoustic noise .......................................... 1-12
active field............................................... 5-26
active idle mode ........................................ 6-8
active mode ...................................... 6-8, 6-11
actuator............................................... 2-2, 4-2
actuator motor control............................. 4-17
adaptability................................................ 1-2
advanced power
management.....................1-15, 1-16, 5-123
AGC circuit............................................. 4-11
air circulation system ................................ 2-3
air filter...................................................... 4-3
ambient temperature.................................. 3-6
APM............................................. 1-15, 5-123
area, service............................................... 3-7
attribute ID.............................................. 5-60
attribute value
current.................................................. 5-61
raw....................................................... 5-61
worst case ............................................ 5-61
automatic acoustic management ........... 5-125
average positioning time ........................... 1-2
B
BIST active - bidirectional...................... 5-18
blower........................................................ 4-3
blower effect ............................................. 2-3
breather, location of .................................. 3-5
burst even1.............................................. 4-16
burst even2.............................................. 4-16
burst odd.................................................. 4-16
busy (BSY) bit ........................................ 5-25
C
requirement............................................ 6-5
COMRESET response............................. 6-21
COMRESET sequence .......................... 5-188
COMRESET, response to.......................... 6-4
conceptual layer, conceptual
diagram ................................................ 5-11
condition, installation ................................ 3-1
configuration
cache
read-ahead ........................................... 6-13
write..................................................... 6-20
cache operation ....................................... 6-20
cached data, invalidation of..................... 6-20
caching
command for............................... 6-14, 6-20
data for................................................. 6-14
device..............................................2-1, 2-2
C141-E280
IN-1
Index
drive system........................................... 2-3
DEVICE CONFIGURATION
system .................................................... 2-3
FREEZE LOCK ...................................5-85
connection
DEVICE CONFIGURATION
drive....................................................... 2-3
connection to SATA interface................... 1-3
connection with host system...................... 3-9
connector location ..................................... 3-9
connector pinout........................................ 5-7
connector specification
host system .......................................... 3-10
connector, device....................................... 3-9
controller circuit .................................2-3, 4-4
counter identifier information ............... 5-151
current and power dissipation.................. 1-10
current attribute value.............................. 5-61
current fluctuation (Typ.) at +5 V
IDENTIFY ...........................................5-86
DEVICE CONFIGURATION
IDENTIFY data structure............5-87, 5-88
DEVICE CONFIGURATION
RESTORE............................................5-85
DEVICE CONFIGURATION
SET ......................................................5-86
device connector........................................3-9
device control field ..................................5-26
device overview.........................................1-1
device ready (DRDY) bit.........................5-25
device seek complete (DSC) bit...............5-25
device specification ...................................1-5
device write fault (DF) bit .......................5-25
device/head field......................................5-24
device-initiated interface power
when power is turned on...................... 1-11
current LBA under test............................ 5-69
current requirements and power
dissipation............................................ 1-10
current span under test............................. 5-70
cylinder high field ................................... 5-24
cylinder low field .................................... 5-23
management .........................................1-17
device-initiated power management
interface................................................1-17
diagnosis .............................................6-2, 7-1
diagnostic code ...............................5-22, 5-41
diagnostic test ..........................................7-11
digital PLL circuit....................................4-11
dimension...................................................3-2
DIPM .......................................................1-17
disk......................................................2-2, 4-2
disk drive outerview ..................................2-2
disk drive removal procedure ..................7-15
disk drive revision number ........................7-6
disk enclosure ............................................2-3
display of disk drive revision
D
D/A converter (DAC).............................. 4-13
data - host to device or device to host
(bidirectional) ...................................... 5-19
data area................................................... 4-14
data assurance in the event of power
failure................................................... 1-13
data buffer ................................................. 1-3
data buffer structure................................. 6-13
data for caching ....................................... 6-14
data format of
number ...................................................7-7
disposition for error field
device attribute value........................... 5-59
guarantee failure threshold value......... 5-59
READ LOG EXT log page
10h.................................................. 5-150
READ LOG EXT log page
content..................................................7-10
DMA active - device to host....................5-16
DMA buffer offset field...........................5-26
DMA data-in command protocol...........5-182
DMA data-out command
11h.................................................. 5-151
SMART comprehensive
protocol ..............................................5-183
DMA setup - device to host or host to
error log............................................ 5-67
SMART summary error log................. 5-65
data format version number..................... 5-60
data request (DRQ) bit ............................ 5-25
data transfer mode ................................. 5-122
data-surface servo format........................ 4-14
DE.............................................................. 2-3
device attribute value, data
device (bidirectional) ...........................5-17
DMA transfer count field.........................5-26
DOWNLOAD MICROCODE.................5-43
DOWNLOAD MICROCODE
operation...............................................5-44
drive connection.........................................2-3
drive error logging capability ..................5-64
drive system configuration ........................2-3
driver circuit.............................................4-14
driving activity LED..................................5-8
format of .............................................. 5-59
device configuration...........................2-1, 2-2
DEVICE CONFIGURATION ................ 5-84
IN-2
C141-E280
Index
FR = D6h................................................. 5-83
frame.......................................................... 3-3
frame information structure (FIS),
outline of.............................................. 5-14
frame structure, mounting ......................... 3-4
full hit ...................................................... 6-18
function and performance.......................... 1-2
E
E_status field........................................... 5-26
effect, blower ............................................ 2-3
electrical specification............................... 5-6
enabling and disabling ............................ 6-21
environmental protection .......................... 1-2
environmental specification .................... 1-11
error (ERR) bit ........................................ 5-25
error correction and retry by ECC............. 1-3
error data structure .................................. 5-66
error field................................................. 5-22
error logging capability........................... 5-64
error posting.......................................... 5-173
error rate.................................................. 1-14
example of model name and product
G
gray code ................................................. 4-16
guarantee failure threshold ...................... 5-64
guarantee failure threshold value,
data format of....................................... 5-59
H
number................................................... 1-7
handling caution ........................................ 3-7
head ........................................................... 2-2
high resistance against shock..................... 1-3
high-speed transfer rate ............................. 1-2
HIPM....................................................... 1-17
hit
full........................................................ 6-18
partial ................................................... 6-19
sequential ............................................. 6-17
host command.......................................... 5-27
host system
connection.............................................. 3-9
host system connector
specification......................................... 3-10
host-initiated interface power
management......................................... 1-17
host-initiated power management
EXECUTE DEVICE
DIAGNOSTIC..................................... 5-41
execution example of READ
MULTIPLE command......................... 5-90
execution timing of
self-calibration....................................... 4-9
F
failure prediction capability flag ............. 5-63
feature........................................................ 1-2
feature flag .............................................. 5-70
features field............................................ 5-23
function................................................ 5-55
value .................................................... 5-55
features field =
01h..................................................... 5-139
02h..................................................... 5-141
03h..................................................... 5-142
04h..................................................... 5-143
C0h ...................................................... 5-85
C1h ...................................................... 5-85
C2h ...................................................... 5-86
C3h ...................................................... 5-86
features field value................................ 5-119
field troubleshooting ............................... 7-13
filter
circulation.............................................. 2-3
FIR circuit ............................................... 4-11
FIS type................................................... 5-14
flag
failure prediction capability................. 5-63
status.................................................... 5-61
FLUSH CACHE ................................... 5-101
FLUSH CACHE EXT........................... 5-172
FR = D5................................................. 5-153
FR = D5h........................................ 5-72, 5-82
FR = D6................................................... 5-76
interface ............................................... 1-17
hot plug.................................................... 5-10
I
ID, attribute ............................................. 5-60
identifier and security level,
relationship between .......................... 5-126
IDENTIFY DEVICE............................. 5-103
IDENTIFY DEVICE command,
information to be read by................... 5-105
IDENTIFY DEVICE DMA................... 5-104
IDLE........................................................ 5-50
IDLE IMMEDIATE ................................ 5-47
information to be read by IDENTIFY
DEVICE command............................ 5-105
INITIALIZE DEVICE
PARAMETERS................................... 5-42
inner guard band...................................... 4-14
input voltage.............................................. 1-8
installation ................................................. 3-8
installation condition ................................. 3-1
C141-E280
IN-3
Index
interface..................................................... 5-1
logical .................................................. 5-11
physical.................................................. 5-2
SATA..................................................... 2-3
interface..................................................... 1-3
interface power
management................................1-17, 1-18
interface signal .......................................... 5-2
invalidating caching-target data .............. 6-15
invalidation of cached data...................... 6-20
IPM.......................................................... 1-17
mounting....................................................3-3
mounting frame structure...........................3-4
mounting limitation ...................................3-4
N
native queued command
protocol ..............................................5-184
non-data command
protocol ...................................5-176, 5-177
O
L
off-line data collection capability ............5-63
off-line data collection
large capacity............................................. 1-2
layer, communication.............................. 5-12
limitation of mounting............................... 3-4
load/unload function................................ 1-14
location of breather.................................... 3-5
location, connector .................................... 3-9
lock function, operation of .................... 5-126
log directory data format......................... 5-64
logical interface....................................... 5-11
low noise and vibration ............................. 1-3
low power idle mode................................. 6-8
status ...........................................5-61, 5-62
operation ....................................................6-1
cache.....................................................6-20
caching .................................................6-14
DOWNLOAD MICROCODE .............5-44
operation confirmation.............................7-11
operation mode ......................................5-166
operation test............................................7-11
operation to move head to reference
cylinder ................................................4-17
orientation..................................................3-3
out of band signaling .................................5-4
outer guard band ......................................4-14
outerview, disk drive .................................2-2
outline ........................................................4-2
outline of
M
maintenance........................................7-1, 7-2
maintenance level...................................... 7-5
maintenance requirement .......................... 7-3
master password .................................... 5-128
mean time between failure
(MTBF)................................................ 1-13
mean time to repair (MTTR)................... 1-13
measurement point, surface
frame information structure
(FIS)..................................................5-14
shadow block register...........................5-13
P
temperature ............................................ 3-6
media defect ............................................ 1-14
microcode data, example
of rewriting .......................................... 5-45
microprocessor unit (MPU)..................... 4-13
miss-hit.................................................... 6-16
mode
active.............................................6-8, 6-11
active idle............................................... 6-8
low power idle ....................................... 6-8
partial................................................... 6-11
power save ............................................. 6-8
settable............................................... 5-119
sleep....................................................... 6-9
slumber ................................................ 6-12
standby................................................... 6-9
model and product number........................ 1-7
motor
P11 function...............................................5-8
PAD .........................................................4-16
parameter ......................................5-27, 5-173
partial hit..................................................6-19
partial mode .............................................6-11
password
master.................................................5-128
user.....................................................5-128
physical Interface.......................................5-2
physical sector servo configuration
on disk surface .....................................4-15
pinout, connector .......................................5-7
PIO data-in command
protocol ...................................5-178, 5-179
PIO data-out command
protocol ...................................5-180, 5-181
PIO setup – device to host .......................5-19
positioning error.......................................1-14
post code..................................................4-16
spindle.................................................... 2-2
IN-4
C141-E280
Index
power amplifier....................................... 4-13
power command...................................... 6-10
power management
interface...................................... 1-17, 1-18
power requirement .................................... 1-8
power save................................................. 6-8
power save controlled by interface
power management (IPM)................... 6-11
power save mode................................ 1-2, 6-8
power save mode of interface ................. 6-11
power supply configuration....................... 4-4
power supply pin..................................... 3-10
power supply segment............................. 3-10
power-on cashing function...................... 6-21
power-on reset....................................... 5-187
power-on sequence..................4-6, 4-7, 5-187
power-on, response to ............................... 6-2
primitive mnemonic .................................. 5-5
programmable filter circuit ..................... 4-11
protocol, command................................ 5-175
read-ahead cache ..................................... 6-13
read-ahead cache system ........................... 1-3
RECALIBRATE...................................... 5-31
recommended equipment........................... 3-8
recommended power-off sequence.......... 1-15
register - device to host............................ 5-16
register - host to device............................ 5-15
reliability ................................................. 1-13
reset ........................................................... 6-2
reset response........................................... 6-21
reset, power-on and COMRESET ......... 5-187
response to COMRESET........................... 6-4
response to power-on................................. 6-2
response to software reset.......................... 6-7
rewriting microcode data
(640 K bytes ), example of................... 5-45
ripple.......................................................... 1-8
rule for maintenance.................................. 7-2
S
SATA interface.......................................... 2-3
SATA interface cable
R
raw attribute value................................... 5-61
READ BUFFER.................................... 5-100
read circuit............................................... 4-11
READ DMA ........................................... 5-96
READ DMA EXT................................. 5-145
READ FP DMA QUEUED................... 5-169
READ FP DMA QUEUED
command protocol............................. 5-185
READ LOG DMA EXT........................ 5-167
READ LOG EXT.................................. 5-148
READ LOG EXT log page 10h, data
format of............................................ 5-150
READ LOG EXT log page 11h, data
format of............................................ 5-151
READ MULTIPLE................................. 5-89
READ MULTIPLE command,
connection............................................ 3-11
SCT COMMAND SET ................5-76, 5-162
SCT READ DATA.......................5-82, 5-153
SCT STATUS REQUEST............5-72, 5-152
SCT WRITE DATA.....................5-83, 5-163
sector count field ..................................... 5-23
sector number field.................................. 5-23
SECURITY DISABLE
PASSWORD...................................... 5-135
SECURITY ERASE PREPARE ........... 5-130
SECURITY ERASE UNIT ................... 5-131
SECURITY FREEZE LOCK................ 5-133
security password, content of ................ 5-128
SECURITY SET PASSWORD............. 5-126
SECURITY SET PASSWORD data,
contents of.......................................... 5-126
SECURITY UNLOCK.......................... 5-128
SEEK....................................................... 5-40
seek operation.......................................... 4-17
selective self-test feature flag .................. 5-70
selective self-test log data
execution example of........................... 5-90
READ MULTIPLE EXT ...................... 5-147
READ NATIVE MAX
ADDRESS......................................... 5-137
READ NATIVE MAX
ADDRESS EXT................................ 5-146
READ SECTOR(S)................................. 5-32
READ SECTOR(S) EXT...................... 5-144
read segment buffer, using...................... 6-16
READ VERIFY SECTOR(S) ................. 5-38
READ VERIFY SECTOR(S)
EXT ................................................... 5-164
read/write circuit .......................2-3, 4-3, 4-10
read/write circuit block diagram ............. 4-10
read/write preamplifier
structure ............................................... 5-69
selective self-test pending
time [min] ............................................ 5-70
self-calibration........................................... 4-8
self-calibration content.............................. 4-8
self-diagnosis............................................. 1-3
self-diagnostics.......................................... 7-8
self-test execution status.................5-62, 5-68
self-test index .......................................... 5-68
self-test number ....................................... 5-68
(PreAMP) ............................................ 4-10
C141-E280
IN-5
Index
sensing and compensating for
spindle........................................................4-2
spindle motor .............................................2-2
spindle motor control...............................4-18
spindle motor control circuit....................4-13
spindle motor driver circuit .......................4-3
stable rotation mode.................................4-18
staggered spin-up.......................................5-8
standard value, surface
temperature.............................................3-6
STANDBY ..............................................5-49
STANDBY IMMEDIATE.......................5-46
standby mode.............................................6-9
start mode ................................................4-18
status ........................................................5-67
status after command execution...............5-22
status field................................................5-25
status field content...................................7-10
status flag.................................................5-61
status report on error occurrence .............6-21
status, off-line data collection..................5-61
structure, data buffer................................6-13
subassembly...............................................4-2
subcommand............................................5-55
surface temperature measurement
external force ......................................... 4-8
sequential hit ........................................... 6-17
serial ATA function............................... 5-124
service area................................................ 3-7
service life ............................................... 1-13
servo burst capture circuit ....................... 4-13
servo circuit............................................... 4-3
servo control............................................ 4-12
servo control circuit................................. 4-12
servo frame format .................................. 4-16
servo mark............................................... 4-16
set device bits – device to host ................ 5-21
SET FEATURES................................... 5-119
SET MAX ............................................. 5-138
SET MAX ADDRESS .......................... 5-138
SET MAX ADDRESS EXT.................. 5-156
SET MAX FREEZE LOCK.................. 5-143
SET MAX LOCK.................................. 5-141
SET MAX SET PASSWORD............... 5-139
SET MAX UNLOCK............................ 5-142
SET MULTIPLE MODE ........................ 5-94
settable mode......................................... 5-119
shadow block register.............................. 5-22
shadow block register,
outline of.............................................. 5-13
shock and vibration ................................. 1-12
shock and vibration specification............ 1-12
signal interface regulation ......................... 5-4
signal segment......................................... 3-10
signal, interface ......................................... 5-2
SLEEP..................................................... 5-53
sleep mode................................................. 6-9
slope of an input voltage at rise................. 1-8
slumber mode .......................................... 6-12
SMART................................................... 5-54
SMART command transport
point .......................................................3-6
surface temperature standard value............3-6
system configuration..................................2-3
system level .............................................7-13
T
tag field information ..............................5-150
temperature, ambient .................................3-6
test..............................................................7-8
test equipment............................................7-8
test flowchart .............................................7-9
test span ...................................................5-69
theory of device operation .........................4-1
tool.............................................................7-8
total number of drive error.......................5-66
track following operation.........................4-17
troubleshooting at factory........................7-14
troubleshooting disk drive replaced
(SCT) ................................................... 5-70
SMART comprehensive error log,
data format of....................................... 5-67
SMART error logging ............................. 5-65
SMART self-test ..................................... 5-67
SMART self-test log data format ............ 5-68
SMART summary error log, data
format of .............................................. 5-65
SN = E0h................. 5-72, 5-76, 5-152, 5-162
SN = E1h................. 5-82, 5-83, 5-153, 5-163
software reset (SRST) ............................. 5-26
software reset response............................ 6-21
software reset, response to......................... 6-7
software settings preservation ................... 6-5
spare disk drive........................................ 7-15
specification .............................................. 1-5
specification summary............................... 1-5
in field ..................................................7-12
troubleshooting procedure .......................7-12
U
UNLOAD IMMEDIATE.........................5-47
unrecoverable read error..........................1-14
user password.........................................5-128
using read segment buffer........................6-16
V
VCM current sense resistor (CSR) ..........4-14
IN-6
C141-E280
Index
viterbi detection circuit ........................... 4-11
WRITE LOG DMA EXT ...................... 5-168
WRITE LOG EXT ................................ 5-160
WRITE MULTIPLE................................ 5-92
WRITE MULTIPLE EXT..................... 5-158
WRITE MULTIPLE FUA EXT............ 5-171
write precompensation............................. 4-10
WRITE SECTOR(S) ............................... 5-34
WRITE SECTOR(S) EXT .................... 5-154
WRITE UNCORRECTABLE
EXT.................................................... 5-165
WRITE VERIFY..................................... 5-36
write/read recovery.................................. 4-16
write-read-verify feature........................ 5-125
W
wide temperature range............................. 1-3
worst case attribute value........................ 5-61
WRITE BUFFER.................................. 5-102
write cache ....................................... 1-4, 6-20
write circuit ............................................. 4-10
WRITE DMA.......................................... 5-98
WRITE DMA EXT............................... 5-155
WRITE DMA FUA EXT...................... 5-159
WRITE FP DMA QUEUED................. 5-170
WRITE FP DMA QUEUED
command protocol............................. 5-186
C141-E280
IN-7
This page is intentionally left blank.
Comment Form
We would appreciate your comments and suggestions regarding this manual.
Manual code
Manual name
C141-E280-01EN
MHZ2320BJ, MHZ2250BJ, MHZ2200BJ, MHZ2160BJ, MHZ2120BJ,
MHZ2080BJ
DISK DRIVES PRODUCT/MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Please mark each item: E(Excellent), G(Good), F(Fair), P(Poor).
General appearance
Technical level
Organization
Clarity
(
(
(
(
(
)
)
)
)
)
Illustration
Glossary
Acronyms & Abbreviations
Index
(
(
(
(
)
)
)
)
Accuracy
Comments & Suggestions
List any errors or suggestions for improvement.
Page
Line
Contents
Please send this form to the address below. We will use your comments in planning future editions.
Address: Fujitsu Learning Media Limited
37-10 Nishikamata 7-chome
Oota-ku
Tokyo 144-0051
JAPAN
Fax: 81-3-3730-3702
Organization:
Name:
C141-E280-01EN
This page is intentionally left blank.
|